JP2020103466A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase fun of a performance using a decorative pattern.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: acquisition means for acquiring determination information by satisfaction of a start condition; determination means for determining whether a special game is performed based on determination information; and performance control means for aligning and displaying plural performance patterns in a visible mode when reporting a determination result by variably displaying a performance pattern. The performance patterns include a first display mode having an identification character, and decoration properties corresponding to the identification character when starting variation display, and a second display mode with the identification character as a main body when starting variation display. The second display mode has a first mode and a second mode having mutually different display modes, and time for aligning and displaying plural performance patterns in a visible mode is longer when using the first mode than when using the second mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

When a lottery related to a jackpot game that is advantageous to a player is performed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine changes the decorative symbol on the display means and displays a display indicating the determination result (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP, 2008-246019, A

By the way, in the gaming machine, the effect may be executed while displaying a decorative pattern on a predetermined display means.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest in the production using a decorative pattern.

The present invention for achieving the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when the variable display is started, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character. And a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1(1) that mainly includes the identification character when the variable display is started). ) Decorative pattern 41) and the second display mode is different from the first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 62-1(1)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 64). (1) decorative pattern 41), and when using the first mode, the time for displaying the plurality of effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner, as compared to the case of using the second mode Is a gaming machine characterized by a long length.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains the determination information when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, the random number obtaining unit 231), and whether to perform the special game based on the determination information. When determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) and notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the effect symbols, effect control in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner Means (for example, effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when starting the variable display, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element) corresponding to the identification character. 413) and a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1) in which the identification character is the main body when starting the variable display (for example, FIG. 62-1). (1) decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 62-1 (1)) and a second mode in which the respective arrangements of the symbols are different from each other. (For example, with the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 64 (1)), in the case where the first mode is used, a plurality of the effect patterns can be visually recognized as compared with the case where the second mode is used. It is characterized in that the time for displaying them in parallel (for example, the time for temporarily stopping) is long.

In addition, the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given as an example in the description of the present invention, and the present invention is not reduced by the reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve interest in the effect using the decorative pattern.

It is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image/sound control part and lamp control part of this Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the operation of basic processing by the game control section. It is the flowchart which shows the operation of processing when power source is cut off by the game control section. It is the flowchart which shows the main control processing of the game control section. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of starting opening switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of gate switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of the special winning opening process. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of game state setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by this Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot design random number, (c) ) Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in a variation pattern selection process and a setting example of a table. It is a block diagram explaining the example of a structure of RAM of a game control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a memory area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the memory part shown to (a). Is. It is the block diagram which explains the constitution example of RAM of the production control section, (a) is the block diagram which shows the constitution of reservation storage area, (b) the block which shows each constitution of the storage section which is shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. It is the flowchart which shows the operation of the production control section, (a) is the figure which shows the main processing, (b) is the figure which shows the interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination production selection process and production selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot production selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending production selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of production button processing. It is a variation effect pattern table for the big hit in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. A low-probability time saving non-gaming variation effect pattern table for small hits and loses is shown. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which showed the modification of the character design enlarged display production. It is the figure which showed the modification of reach time plan drawing production. It is the figure which showed the modification of reach time plan drawing production. It is the figure which showed the modification of the aspect in which a highly decorative decorative pattern is cut off and displayed from the display area of an image display part. It is a figure showing the modification of the display mode of the 4th design. It is the figure which showed the modification of the variation production example of A mode as the production mode in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect|action which an effect control part performs using an image display part. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is the figure which shows one form of the production which the production control section uses the image display section. It is a figure showing an example of a front view of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is the figure which shows the main processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the timer interruption processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the icon change production processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the icon change production decision processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icons. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the occurrence frequency of a hold icon display mode and change effect generation timing, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency of change effect classification and change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing a relationship 2 of occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows a relationship between an icon display mode and a notification sound at the time of icon occurrence (change). FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of change production at the time of winning. It is the timing chart 2 of the change production at the time of winning. It is the figure which shows the production example of change production at the time of winning a prize. 9 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. 9 is a timing chart 2 of a normal change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of normal change pattern 01. 3 is a timing chart 1 of a character action change pattern 01. 3 is a timing chart 2 of a character action change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of character action change pattern 01. FIG. 103 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 102; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is the figure which shows the production example of design action change pattern 01. FIG. 107 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 106; It is a timing chart when variation production is started from a customer waiting state. It is the figure which shows the production example where fluctuation production is started from the waiting state for the customer. FIG. 110 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 109; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variation production. It is the figure which shows the production example where the number of reservations increases during fluctuation production. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is the figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during a specific reach effect. It is the figure which shows the production example where the number of reservations increases during particular reach production. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is the figure which shows the production example where the reservation number increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[First Embodiment]
[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball launched by an instruction operation of a player wins. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 on which gaming balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the gaming board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front surface, a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 that forms a passage through which a game ball shot from below rises toward the upper position of the game area 111, and a game. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the area 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for presentation is arranged at the position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 includes a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays a decorative design for notifying the player of a design lottery result (design variation result), for example, as the game progresses by the player, An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item or an effect image using a hold display described later is displayed.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the panel lamp 116 emits light to perform various effects.

In the game area 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game balls fall are arranged. Further, in the game area 111, various kinds of prizes related to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, in the game area 111, a discharge opening 117 is provided for discharging, out of the game area 111, any of the game balls that have been hit in the game area 111 and have not won the winning opening.

In the present embodiment, as various characters related to winning and lottery, a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is started when a game ball wins, and a first starting opening 121 and a second starting opening 122 are usually passed when the game ball passes. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is provided on the game board 110. In addition, in FIG. 1, the gates 124 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Moreover, the 1st starting opening 121 and the 2nd starting opening 122 said here refer to the winning opening which becomes the trigger of the operation of the predetermined 1 special symbol display device. Specifically, the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 are provided with switches (first starting opening switch 211 and second starting opening switch 212, which will be described later) that detect passage of a game ball when winning. Has been. Then, when the game ball wins the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which is a trigger for activating the special symbol display device.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that is turned on and off by a pair of tulip-shaped blades opened and closed by an electric solenoid. When the blade of the electric tulip 123 is closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the blade is opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 is enlarged and the game ball is moved to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, in the electric tulip 123, when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the blade opens while lighting or blinking for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as gaming states, a low-probability state having a low winning probability and a high-probability state having a higher winning probability than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, the state is controlled to be either the low-probability state or the high-probability state based on a predetermined condition.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100, as a game state, there is no electric support with a small number of winning opportunities to the second starting port 122, and an electric sapo state with more winning opportunities to the second starting port 122 than no electric supporting. have. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as a jackpot or a lottery number of special symbol lottery, it is controlled to be in one of a non-power-supported state and a power-supported state. The power support state, for example, to shorten the normal symbol fluctuation time, to extend the opening time of the electric tulip 123, to make the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery high probability, any one or more of It is a game state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a time saving state where the special symbol variation time is long and a time saving state where the special symbol variation time is shorter than the time saving nothing state.
In the present embodiment, the power support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the power-supporting state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the non-power-supporting state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other winning prizes and other prize-related lottery items, a lottery is performed even if a game ball wins, as well as a large winning opening 125 as a special electric prized item that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery. A normal winning opening 126, which is not provided, is provided on the game board 110. The special winning opening 125 is provided with a special winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the special winning opening 125. In the following description, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the special winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display unit 130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of holdings is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110.

In addition, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board that determines whether or not a special symbol is won, an effect control board that totally controls effects, an image control board that controls effects by images and sounds, various lamps, and Various boards (not shown) such as a lamp control board for controlling the effect by the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs the DC power supply to various substrates is provided.

When the player touches the handle 151 to rotate the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member 150 has a predetermined hitting time (eg, 100 game balls per minute) with the hitting force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launching device (not shown) that electrically launches. The frame member 150 also supplies a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launching device one at a time in conjunction with the operation of the player's lever 152, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the launching device. And a plate 153 for temporarily storing. For example, payout balls by a payout unit are paid out to the plate 153.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is integrally formed with the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated may be considered. Further, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is caused to emit light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of the game balls and the game balls accumulated in the plate 153 even when the player is in contact with the handle 151 of the launching device. And a take-out button 155 for dropping the case into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light-emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light, such as a pattern by lighting/blinking and a difference in light emission color. Note that, regarding the frame lamp 157, a configuration example capable of performing an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of the display device 130 arranged at the lower left of the game board 110, FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
The display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2(a), is a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a winning of the first starting opening 121, and a winning of the second starting opening 122. The second special symbol display 222 which operates correspondingly, and the normal symbol display 223 which operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. Based on the winning of the first starting opening 121, the first special symbol display 221 variably displays the special symbol and then stops and displays the lottery result. The second special symbol display 222, based on the winning of the second starting opening 122, displays the special symbol in a variable display after the variable display, and displays the lottery result. The normal symbol display device 223 displays the lottery result by stopping and displaying the ordinary symbols after the gaming balls have passed through the gate 124, after displaying the ordinary symbols in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

In addition, the display unit 130 is a first special symbol display indicator 218 that operates in response to the reservation in the first special symbol display device 221, and a second operation that corresponds to the reservation in the second special symbol display device 222. It is provided with a 2 special symbol hold indicator 219 and a normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operates corresponding to the hold in the normal symbol indicator 223. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holdings depends on the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be described. During the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variation display for one prize is being performed), if the game ball is won in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122, the special symbol is changing. In addition, the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the subsequent winning cannot be started. Therefore, the subsequent winnings are stored in a limited number (for example, 4) as a limit, and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed. Pending
In addition, the same process as the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold is made and the number of the hold (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold display 218, the second special symbol hold display 219 and the normal symbol hold display 220.

Further, the display device 130 includes a status display device 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high-probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time saving state in which the special symbol variation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting the ball right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the display device 130 includes a round number display device 225 that displays the number of rounds when the special winning opening 125 is operated in the jackpot game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the special winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input for the effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161, an effect key 162 composed of a plurality of keys adjacent to the effect button 161 and arranged in a substantially cross shape, Are arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates any one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114 by operating the effect key 162 including four keys arranged in a cross shape, and the effect button 161 is pressed. By operating, it is possible to perform an effect of selecting the instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, various input forms such as a lever and a handle in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and the effect key 162 shown in FIG.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control unit 200 that determines whether or not a special symbol is won. Further, as sub-control means, there are provided an effect control unit 300 that controls the effect in a centralized manner, and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of payout balls.

[Structure and function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining whether a special symbol is won, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, and the like, a working memory of the CPU 201, and the like. And a RAM 203 that can be used.

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high-probability state and a high-probability time saving game state that is a time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving game state that is a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability state, and a time-saving state. It is either a probabilistic short-time non-gaming state, a low probabilistic state or a low probabilistic short-time non-gaming state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high-probability state and the low-probability state based on a predetermined condition, and switches between the no time-saving state and the time-saving state. Further, the game control unit 200, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the no time saving state, the control is such that the normal symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time of the electric tulip 123 is extended, and the like. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when the game ball wins the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122. Then, a special game such as a jackpot game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 keeps the open state a predetermined number of times until the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have won). Control to repeat only. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the special winning opening 125 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the ordinary symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball during the special symbol variation due to winning in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122, or the gaming ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol variation. The pending setting that occurs due to this is set.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 accompanies the game control such as the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state, and the setting information of the hold. The information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 121, the second starting opening 122, the special winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one gaming ball according to the place where the playing ball wins. The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if the game ball wins the first starting opening 121, three prize balls, if the game ball winning the second starting hole 122 wins four prize balls, if the game ball wins the large winning opening 125 wins 13 prizes. When a game ball wins the ball, the normal winning hole 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout controller 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball in conjunction with it.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information about the number of paid prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game control section 200 has a first starting opening detecting section (first starting opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting a winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 121, as detecting means. , To the gate 124, a second starting opening detection unit (second starting opening switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 for opening/closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. The gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected.
Further, in the game control unit 200, a special winning opening detection unit (big winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting a winning of a game ball into the special winning opening 125, and a big winning opening door 125D of the special winning opening 125. A special winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 that is set to a closed state and an open state with a protruding inclination, and a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects winning of a game ball into the normal winning opening 126. , Are connected.

Further, in the game control unit 200, a first special symbol hold display 218 that displays the number of unchanged holdings that have won the first starting opening 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second during the change of the special symbol. A second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of pending unvaried prizes entered into the starting opening 122, and a regular symbol hold indicator that displays the number of pending unvaried symbols that have passed through the gate 124 during fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. 220 and 220 are connected.
Furthermore, in the game control unit 200, a first special symbol display device 221 for displaying the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121, and the second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the result of the special symbol variation display and the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display that displays the variation display of the normal symbol and the result of the normal symbol lottery The device 223 and the status display device 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, the gate switch 214, the special winning opening switch 215 and the normal winning opening switch 217 are sent to the game control section 200. In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, a special winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, a first special symbol hold display 218, a second special symbol hold display 219, a normal symbol hold display 220. The first special symbol display 221, the second special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223 and the status display 224 are sent. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to a board external information terminal board 350 that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits the information regarding the number of paid prize balls acquired from the payout control unit 330 and the information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. To do.

[Structure and function of payout controller]
The payout controller 330 performs a calculation process when controlling the payout of payout balls, a ROM 332 in which programs executed by the CPU 331, various data, and the like are stored, and a RAM 333 used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And are equipped with.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of payout balls based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires from the game control unit 200 a command for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls according to a place where the game ball has won (the first starting opening 121 etc.). Then, the payout driving unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls designated by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor that sends out the game balls from the storage unit of the game balls.

Further, in the payout control unit 330, a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the storage unit of the game balls by the payout driving unit 334, and a game ball in a storage unit (not shown). Detecting presence/absence of a ball, and detecting whether or not the plate 153 holding the game ball used when the player plays the game and the paid prize ball is full. The full tank detector 337 is connected. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs a predetermined process according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout controller 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout driving unit 334 is instructed to pay out, information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. Also, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure and function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and the date and time. And a real time clock (RTC) 304 for measuring
The effect control unit 300, for example, sets the effect content based on the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received and the effect content according to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Moreover, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 gives an instruction to set a screen display for waiting for a customer as one of the effects.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets effect contents based on the change information of the high-probability state and the low-probability state and the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing execution of the set effect content to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.
In addition, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the initial screen when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on. Although the details will be described later, the initial screen is an initial screen that is displayed when the power is turned on, and includes, for example, a power recovery image 75 (FIG. 57(2) described later) and a default symbol (FIG. 57(3)). Is included.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls effects using various lamps and the movable accessory 115. Has been done.

[Configuration/function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs a calculation process when controlling an image and sound expressing the effect content, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. A ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316 are provided.

Then, the image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 has a symbol image and a background image displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, a character for displaying the notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data such as items is stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various kinds of acoustic data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and further, sound effects such as jingles.
The CPU 311 performs analysis of animation patterns, creation of a display list in which commands relating to drawing are compiled, transmission of the display list to the VDP 314, and the like, based on the hold number command or the fluctuation effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300. To do.

The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform drawing processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character/item display, and the like, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 according to the image data subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to drawing processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be separately provided.

[Lamp control unit configuration/functions]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and programs and various data executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory of the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, and the like based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, in the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320, lighting/blinking pattern data and light emission color pattern data (light emission pattern) for the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect contents set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads, from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322, one corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the contents of the effect set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, each of the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 is a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110. Are separately configured in the game control board, the production control board as the sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited thereto. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 is, as a functional unit that executes various lottery processes, a random number acquisition unit 231, an ordinary symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234. , A normal symbol variation control unit 236, and is provided.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is provided with a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Further, the game control unit 200 is a special winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as a functional unit that executes operation control of various types of characters and data processing regarding prize balls and the like. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the random number value used in the special symbol lottery and the random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122, a numerical value within a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from the inside. The acquired random number value is used for the determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, as the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery, there are jackpot random numbers indicating whether or not jackpots, symbol random numbers indicating types of jackpots, fluctuation pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and the like.
Further, in the case of the random number value used in the ordinary symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in the predetermined range on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) Will be done. The acquired random number value is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. In addition, as the random number used for the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a hit random number indicating whether or not it is a hit, a pattern random number or a variation pattern random number indicating the type of hit may be set.
When the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the lottery result.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, when the variation of the special symbol starts, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is “whether or not it is a jackpot”, “a jackpot when the jackpot is won”. “Type” and “whether it is a small hit or a big hit when the big hit is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 211 or the second starting opening switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether to perform a special game (big hit game or the like) advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. The special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) described above means a process in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is classified into a plurality of types according to the game state that occurs after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by a combination of no time saving state or time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state. That is, as the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the jackpot game is finished, after the jackpot game is finished, a jackpot that becomes a high probability short game state (hereinafter, a high probability short game jackpot), a low probability short game state Big jackpot that becomes (henceforth, low probability short time gaming state big jackpot), high probability time short and no gaming state jackpot (hereinafter, high probability time short and no gaming state big jackpot), low probability time short and no gaming state jackpot (below, low Probability time saving jackpot in no gaming state) is possible. These jackpots are associated with respective individual special symbols, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of the special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

In addition, the "big hit" may be divided into a big hit that can be expected to pay out a large amount of game balls for a long time of a big hit game, and a big hit that has a short time for a big hit game and can hardly be expected to pay out game balls. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long win", a round that is maintained until the open state of the special winning opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapse or winning of 10 game balls) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Be done. In the case of "short win", a round in which the special winning opening 125 is opened for a fixed time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times).

In addition, the “small hit” when the big hit is not won is a small hit game in which the special winning opening 125 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Done. At the time of winning the small hit, the gaming state before winning the small hit is continued even after the small hitting game is over. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time short game state, the high probability time short game state is continued even after the small hit game is finished, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, if the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low probability time short no-play state, the low probability time short no-play state is continued even after the small hit game ends, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "off", and none of the above-mentioned game states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a determination pattern as to whether or not to carry out a jackpot game and a variation pattern capable of performing a reach effect in a decorative symbol variation effect associated with a special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result or the like. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of operations of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, the "reach" is an effect for causing the player to expect a big hit in the decorative pattern described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is “win or not” by using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether to perform the auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Moreover, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the “type of hit” when the determination result is a hit. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
The normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 223 in accordance with the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the winning symbol is a “hit”, and the game ball is in the second starting opening 122. Generate a state that makes winning easy. Further, when it is determined that the electric tulip 123 is out of contact, the open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. Although the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, for example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

The special winning opening operation control unit 237, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines that it is a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery, as a big hit game, a special winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning jackpot. The opening operation of 125 is controlled. Further, the special winning opening operation control unit 237, when the special symbol determination unit 234 is determined to be "small hit" in the special symbol lottery, as the small hit game, opens the special winning opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times. ..
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for controlling the number of prize balls to be awarded to various types of prizes related to winning and lottery, and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs initialization and initialization of various devices as a basic process at the time of startup. Then, after performing the basic process, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control process, which is a series of processes related to the progress of the game. Further, when turning off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power-off time processing.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is turned off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes a return process (S605). In this return processing, the game control unit 200 sets the sub control means such as the effect control unit 300, which is associated with the return from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether it is a big hit game, high probability state or low probability state, time saving state and no time saving state). A command for setting the sub control unit is output to the effect control unit 300 so as to reflect any of the above). In addition, in this return processing, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), and the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 initializes. As processing, the contents stored in the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control unit to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control unit) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, the RAM 313, and the RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) or the setting of the sub-board (see S608) is finished, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not interruption permission (S610), interruption prohibition (S611), symbol random number control processing (S612), initial value random number updating processing (S613), and power-off flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number updating process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interrupt along with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff process).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power-off process by the game control unit 200.
In the power-off process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing for gaming machines]
Next, a main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the production control unit 300, which is a sub control unit, to control the production, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Direct the payout control.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in the game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset constant time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset constant time intervals, and when interrupts are permitted in the loop processing shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), main control is performed as interrupt processing. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric auditors product process, a prize ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start opening switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the starting opening switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number obtaining unit 231, monitors the states of the first starting opening switch 211 and the second starting opening switch 212 in FIG. 3, and turns the switches ON. When it becomes, the process for special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described later in detail, when performing the preliminary determination process in the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, Perform the process for pre-determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is ON, for normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol process, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the process associated with this symbol variation. To do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol fluctuation and the processing accompanying this symbol fluctuation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a special winning opening process and an electric tulip process are performed.
In the special winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the special winning opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, sets a command for controlling the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs the command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs the command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process of S802 to S804, and stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, if the control command is generated in the processing of S802 to S805). For example, the control command is read and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of the series of main control processes. That is, the command generated in each processing of S802 to S805 by each function as the first processing means is stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each processing. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process, which are accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the final command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modification of basic operation of gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, the interrupt is permitted in the loop process part of the basic process, and the main control process including a series of processes is executed as the interrupt process. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular time intervals, and the specific realizing means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated in the series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may be returned to the main control process every fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control processing into the series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt is generated at regular intervals as in the operation described with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. It may be configured to return to the main control processing incorporated in the basic processing.

In addition, when outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and the function of the output control unit 240 which is the second processing means is called. Output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. Further, in the basic processing, the processing procedure may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, so the generated command is output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. Processing. Note that, in the case where commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 in response to a specific processing request, and a processing procedure of collectively outputting the commands is adopted. May be.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
Random number value as the determination information used in various lottery in game control such as special symbol lottery is counted by the counter, starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, it is incremented by 1. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting opening switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the ordinary symbol process (FIG. 16). It This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum value of the set random numbers (for example, 299 in the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Return to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, in the initial value random number updating process of S613, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed.

[Starting switch processing by the game controller]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the starting opening switch process of the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In the starting opening switch processing, processing for winning in the first starting opening 121 and processing for winning in the second starting opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting opening 121 and the first starting opening switch 211 has been turned on (S901). If the first starting opening switch 211 is turned ON, then the game control section 200 determines whether or not the number U1 of unreserved reserves in the winning of the first starting opening 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit value is four. If the number U1 of reservations has reached the upper limit value (No in S902), it is not possible to hold the unvaried winnings any more, so the processing for the winnings in the first starting opening 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the number of holdings U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination by the present winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since it is the winning of the first starting opening 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number updating process of S801. Then, by this random number value, the result of the special symbol lottery is fixed in the later special symbol processing. The random number here means a big hit, a small hit or a big hit random number that determines whether to lose or not, a kind of big hit (a short-lived state or a short-lived state after the end of a big-play game, a high probability state and a low probability state, a long hit, a short hit Winning) random number value to determine (big hit symbol random value), fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation of the symbol, in the case of deviation, change the reach pattern (variation time) to be able to execute the reach effect described later A reach random number value for determining whether or not is included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S904). Pre-judgment process, the winning number has already been obtained by winning at the starting mouth but the random number has not been judged by the special symbol process to be described later (reserved ball), the random number by the special symbol process This is a process (preliminary determination) of determining the random number before the determination.

Then, the effect control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines the random number by the special symbol process based on the determination result of the random number determined by the preliminary determination process (preliminary determination result), and notifies the determination result. In advance, it is possible to perform a notice effect that suggests the determination result. This notice production is, for example, in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (holding ball) for which a random number has already been acquired by winning at the starting opening but the random number has not yet been determined by the special symbol processing. It is performed using a hold display effect (described later) displayed on 114. By the notice effect based on this preliminary determination, with respect to the holding ball corresponding to the preliminary determination related to the notice effect, the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing is suggested to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while holding an expectation for the reserved ball. Details of the notice effect based on the preliminary determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number U1 of reservations (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets, in the RAM 203, a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination process of S904 in order to notify the effect determination unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets a holding number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase of the holding number U1 in S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning at the first starting opening 121. ..

Next, processing for winning in the second starting opening 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). If the second starting port switch 212 is turned on, then the game control section 200 determines whether or not the number U2 of unreserved parts in the winning of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit value is four. When the number U2 of reservations has reached the upper limit value (No in S909), it is not possible to hold the unvaried winnings any more, so the processing for the winnings in the second starting opening 122 is ended.

On the other hand, when the number U2 of reservations is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery for this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since it is the winning of the second starting port 122, as in S903 above, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, a reach random number value, a variation pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired. It The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number updating process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is fixed in the special symbol processing later by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination processing is the same as that in S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number U2 of reservations (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information by the preliminary determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets a hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase of the hold number U2 in S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning at the second starting opening 122. ..

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 is turned on, then the game control section 200 determines whether or not the unfixed number G of reservations is less than the upper limit value (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit value is four. When the number G of reservations has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), it is not possible to hold the unvarying winnings any more, and thus the gate switch processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery for this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since it is the winning of the gate 124, a random number value (such as a random number value) for ordinary symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a hold number G increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase of the hold number G in S1004 in the RAM 203 (S1005), The process for winning in the gate 124 is completed.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot gaming flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol fluctuation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then performs a process related to the unvarying holding numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of holdings U1 for winning the first starting opening 121 and the number of holdings U2 for winning the second starting opening 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting opening. ..

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the number of holdings U2 related to winning of the second starting opening 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number U2 of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number U2 of reservations (S1104). On the other hand, if the number of holdings U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of holdings U1 related to the winning of the first starting opening 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number U1 of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number U1 of reservations (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of holdings U1=0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning for starting the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol fluctuation is not started, and the customer waiting setting process of another routine Is executed to end the processing (S1116).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the number of holdings U2 relating to the winning of the second starting opening 122 is given priority. That is, when the number U2 of holdings is 1 or more, the process regarding the number U2 of holdings is performed, and when the number U2 of holdings is 0, the process regarding the number U1 of holdings is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, it is also possible to perform control such that the holding numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the winning order regardless of whether the winning is the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122.

After subtracting the pending number U1 or the pending number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). As will be described later in detail, by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process, setting information for variation of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (big hit symbol, game) State, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these pieces of information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. 2, based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The fluctuation of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a fluctuation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is changing in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the variation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the variation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection processing of S1109. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation continues, so the special symbol processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 as the big hit determination process in S1108. It stops with the symbol determined in (S1113). A variation stop command for stopping a decorative pattern described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the processing during stop of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the processing during suspension will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Big hit determination process by game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 of FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not a jackpot or a jackpot (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not the jackpot or the jackpot is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the value set as the jackpot winning value or the jackpot winning value. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20A).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines a big hit symbol random value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (a jackpot in the high-probability time-short game state, a jackpot in the low-probability time-short game state, etc.) is determined. Which of the jackpots is determined by which of the values of the jackpot symbol random numbers acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the preset value for each jackpot type (FIG. 20 ( See b)).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol representing the type of the jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number (jackpot symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination of S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol representing the small hit (hereinafter, a small hit symbol) as the setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination of S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), the special symbol determination unit 234 then uses the symbol (hereinafter, a symbol) which indicates that the special symbol has been missed in the lottery as the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection processing, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether the time saving state is the time saving state, the high probability state or the low probability state). (S1301). Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been made in the special symbol lottery this time, using the result of the determination in S1202 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12) (S1302). Then, if it is a big hit (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if no big hit (No in S1302), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for making the player expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)). ..
When the reach effect is performed as a result of the determination using the random number value (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for the loss from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and values of fluctuation pattern random numbers. It is the table which matched.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number is obtained, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether a big hit or not) The variation pattern table to be referred to differs according to the difference in whether or not the reach effect is performed when a big hit has not occurred), so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1309). The change pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the change start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation patterns selected in this embodiment and their settings will be described later.

[Processing during stop by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the content of the processing during stop (S1115 of FIG. 11).
In the process during stop, the game control unit 200 first checks in the flag setting of the RAM 203 whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. Is checked (S1403). Then, if the number of times of lottery J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the special winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not a flag indicating a high probability state (hereinafter, a high probability flag) is set to ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high accuracy flag and the previous time saving flag are ON, it is a high probability time saving game state, and if the high accuracy flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, there is a high probability time saving no game state. is there.

If the high-accuracy flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and the lottery number X becomes 0. It is checked whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of times of lottery X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high-accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the special winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

If the high-accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), or after the high-accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or the value of the lottery number X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not it has been a big hit in the special symbol lottery this time (S1409). When it is a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 next determines the kind of the big hit (S1410). It should be noted that here, as an example of determination of the type of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20B to be described later is set, it is Yes in S1409. If the outlying symbol or the small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of big hit is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a big hit game state (long hit game state) in which the type of big hit is long hit. It should be noted that here, in long hits, no distinction is made between a high-probability state and a low-probability state. Whether to be a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on a corresponding flag in a game state setting process (FIG. 18) in a special winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the type of big hit is not long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). Thereby, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a big hit game state (short hit game state) in which the kind of big hit is short hit. Similar to the case of long hit, the case of short hit does not distinguish between high probability state and low probability state.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery numbers J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411, S1412 the hit game flag is turned on. In other words, the opening operation according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery is set.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in the opening operation according to the big hit game flag in the RAM 203 in the effect control unit 300 (S1418), and ends the stopped process. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1409), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the in-stop processing is ended.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). Thereby, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit game state. In the small hit game, as described above, the special winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 of FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and thus the process is terminated (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is a flag that is set in a state where the special symbol stops changing and is not held.

[Ordinary symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the regular symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is released according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win the second starting opening 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state, and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol process is ended without starting the normal symbol fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a normal symbol fluctuation (S1602). If the normal symbol fluctuation is not in progress (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the number G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanging amount of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number G of reservations is 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, and thus the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number G of reservations (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current regular symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the regular symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not the player has won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the hit random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the regular symbol lottery is won, a symbol (hereinafter, a winning symbol) representing that the symbol is won is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, the symbol indicating that the lottery has been missed (hereinafter referred to as “missing symbol”) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This variation time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON during the setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set for a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). To be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). In addition, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol can be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a variation pattern random value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 normally changes the variation pattern random value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the change of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the normal symbol reaches the variation time set in S1607 in S1608. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), since the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time ends (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a win (S1611). If it is a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol process is ended without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Big prize hole processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special winning opening process of the electric auditors product process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this special winning opening process, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the special winning opening 125, and the special winning opening processing is ended (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the special winning opening operation control unit 237, the opening in the operation control during the jackpot started in the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop process (FIG. 14) It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1702), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not a preset time (opening time) at which the opening operation should be performed has elapsed. Yes (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the special winning opening 125 is continued, so the special winning opening processing is ended (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then sets the operation of the special winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the winning number C (C=0). Then, (S1705), the value of the number of rounds R of operation of the special winning opening 125 is incremented by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the operation of the special winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the special winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (operation round number) to be operated in the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the special winning opening 125 operates, there is a case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit, and a small hit. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the type of these hits. In the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the special winning opening 125 is continuously operated a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, in the case of long hits, for example, 15 rounds (15R) of operation are performed, and 29.5 seconds of opening are performed once in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, it is operated for two rounds (2R), and in one round, 0.9 seconds is opened once. More specifically, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation in the short hit and the operation in the small hit are compared with each other in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the special winning opening 125 visible to the player is the same in the case of short hit and the case of small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the big winning opening 125 on the game board 110. You cannot do it.

In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative open time of the special winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the special winning opening 125 has to be continuously opened a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to distinguish between the operation with the small hit and the operation with the short hit as described above, in the case of the small hit, within a range in which the cumulative open time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, The operation mode in which the special winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the case of a short hit, the same number of rounds as the number of small wins is set.

Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). When the open state of the special winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 next determines the number C of winnings into the special winning opening 125 is a prescribed number (for example, 9). It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the number (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the winning prize number C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the special winning opening 125 is continued, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or the winning number C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1709), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the special winning opening 125 (closing). Yes (S1710).

Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of the operation of the special winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operation is performed, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the special winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big hit game flag among the ending operations set in the long hit game and the short hit game.
After that, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation according to the big hit game flag in the RAM 203 in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number R of the operation of the special winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the expected time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717), then the special winning opening operation control unit 237 turns off the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The special winning opening process is ended (S1719). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations in and after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the special winning opening 125 is in operation (open) (S1716). If it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operations in S1705 and thereafter are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations in S1708 and thereafter are executed.
The effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made, for example, based on the types of symbols set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Note that these determinations are substantially the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), and thus the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, and the game state setting process is ended.
When the type of jackpot is the jackpot in the low probability time saving game state (No in S1801, S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns the time saving flag ON (S1804). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the short game state when the probability is low. Further, the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability-time short game state is performed 100 times, the low-probability-time short game state ends, and the low-probability-time short game state is entered.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is the jackpot in the low probability time saving no gaming state (No in S1801, No in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time saving flag and the high accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after this jackpot becomes a low probability time saving no game state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in the high probability time saving game state (S1801, No in S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10,000 in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 in the illustrated example. As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a high probability short game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-short game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-short game state ends, and the low-probability time-short game state is entered.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is the jackpot in the high probability time saving non-gaming state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high-accuracy flag (S1809), and the initial value of the lottery number X. (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a high probability time saving mode. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-short non-gaming state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-short non-gaming state ends, and the low-probability time-short non-gaming state is entered.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process of the electric auditors product process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, and the electric tulip processing is ended (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 in the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. For example, when the time saving flag is OFF during the setting in S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time saving flag is ON, it is opened for 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern is set to open three times in time. As described above, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (in the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and the second starting opening 122 facilitates winning. Is done. In addition, when the time saving flag is ON or OFF, a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol process (see FIG. 16). You may comprise so that a pattern may be set.

When it is determined that the electric tulip 123 is in operation in S1902 (Yes in S1902) or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines that the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, and thus the electric tulip processing ends (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Method of judgment using random numbers]
Here, a method of determination by random numbers, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc., will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
20(a) is a jackpot random number configuration example used in the special symbol lottery, FIG. 20(b) is a jackpot symbol random number configuration example used in the special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20(c) is a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of the reach random number used, FIG. 20 (d), respectively, a configuration example of the hit random number used in the normal symbol lottery is shown.

Referring to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is a low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is a high probability state 2 types and small hits are set. The range of the value of the random number (big hit random number) is 0 to 299 in all 300. In the case of the special symbol lottery in the low probability state (big hit lottery), only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when a special symbol lottery is performed by winning the starting openings 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the winning probability is 10 times as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, three small winning numbers are set regardless of whether the winning probability is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, taking the special symbol lottery in the low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number value (see S903, S910) acquired upon winning the prize in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "5" of the jackpot drawing in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high-probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), the jackpot symbols include five types of low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent probability symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols representing that it is a jackpot in a low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a long-hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability time short game jackpot. Indicates that there is. The low probability symbol B indicates that it is a big hit in a long-time (4 rounds) and low-probability time short game state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that the long-hit (15 rounds) and the high-probability time saving game state are the big hits. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that it is a big hit in the long-time (8 rounds) and high-probability time-shortened gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a high probability short-time non-gaming big hit. The latent probability symbol is a symbol representing that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a high probability short time non-gaming big hit. Therefore, the high-probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the big hit game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent production in which the player is not clearly notified of the high-probability symbol. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability pattern B. The range of the value of the random number is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, the winning value is set for each of the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122, which is a trigger for the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as the winning value for both the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low-probability pattern B, both the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 are assigned 15 values as winning values. Therefore, when the big hit is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning in the high-probability symbol A when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121 is 20/250 (=2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting opening 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (=15/25) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting opening 122.

In the high-probability pattern B, five values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as the winning values when the second starting opening 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol B is 25/250 (=1/10) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting opening 122.

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121.
On the other hand, ten values are assigned as winning values when the second starting opening 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol B is 10/250 (=1/25) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting opening 122.

In the high-probability pattern D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, ten values are assigned as winning values when the second starting opening 122 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning in the high-probability symbol D is 10/250 (=1/25) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting opening 122.

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (=1/10) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121.
On the other hand, five values are assigned as the winning values when the second starting opening 122 is won. Therefore, in the special symbol lottery started by winning in the second starting opening 122, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol E is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the latent probability pattern, 100 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting opening 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning with a latent probability symbol is 100/250 (=2/5) when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121.
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting opening 122, and when winning in the second starting opening 122, the winning in the latent probability symbol does not occur.

Here, the low probability symbol A will be described as an example. The jackpot symbol random number value (see S903 and S910) acquired when the winning of the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 is a trigger is shown in FIG. ) It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of the low probability pattern A in “0” to “34”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the winning probability of the jackpot type when the first start opening 121 is won and when the second start opening 122 is won, it is possible to provide various game characteristics. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 in the game board 110 is devised so that it is easy to aim at either one of the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 in a specific state (mode). With the configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the game more actively.

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The reach random number is set according to the number of holdings, as will be described later. Here, the reach random number when the number of reservations is 0 will be described as an example.
With reference to FIG. 20C, the random number value range is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) capable of executing the reach effect is set (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). 22 random number values are assigned to (with reach), and 228 random number values are assigned to a lottery result (without reach) that does not have a variation pattern capable of executing reach effect (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125) when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit. Here, the reach effect is an effect performed in the image display unit 114 when the special symbol changes. Below, the production at the time of special symbol variation that does not have a reach pattern that can be executed is called a reach-less production, and the production at the time of a special symbol change that has a reach pattern that can be performed is correspondingly produced with reach. Call.

Here, taking the case of reach as an example, the reach random number value (see S903 and S910) acquired upon winning the prize in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 is the reach in FIG. 20C. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value “0 to 21”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol variation, in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, written as special symbol display devices 221 and 222). In the image display unit 114, an effect using a decorative design is performed. The decorative pattern is configured by displaying, for example, three rows of symbols each consisting of a number sequence in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time that the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 start scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display of the special symbol (start of scrolling the decorative symbol), the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, three identical numbers are lined up on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally in the stop display of the decorative symbol. The effect using the decorative symbol that is accompanied by the variable display of the special symbol is called variable effect.

In the reachable effect, the following operation is performed on the decorative pattern as the variable effect. First, any two symbols (series) are temporarily stopped first before the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixedly stopped. At this time, the same number is temporarily stopped on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. To further explain, if the decorative pattern is scrolling in the vertical direction, the same number is temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed of the last row is gradually decreased to give the player the expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on a straight line. Then, after the last one row is temporarily stopped, three symbols are definitely stopped.
Here, in the reachable effect, the SP reach effect and the SP/SP reach effect may be performed before the fixed stop of the three symbols. The SP reach effect is generally called a super reach or a special reach, and is an effect that is expected to hit the jackpot more than the reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear or a story develops. .. In addition, SP/SP reach is generally called Super Super Reach or Special Special Reach, and it is a production that expects a big hit than SP Reach, and it is a moving image where various characters appear and stories are developed. Is the production of.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, the SP reach or SP/SP reach effect is set to be executed when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds). .. Note that the above-described variation effect that is performed together with the reachable effect is also referred to as a reach-time variation effect.
On the other hand, in the production without reach, before the decorative pattern scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixedly stopped, the production such as the production with reach such as the production with reach is not performed, and the horizontal (vertical) or The symbols are fixedly stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line extending diagonally.

As described above, with the reach random number, when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is lost, the reach display is performed in the image display unit 114 as a variation pattern capable of executing the reach production, or the reach production can be executed. Determines whether to perform a reach-less effect that does not use a variation pattern. Further, the reach random number is adapted to change the execution ratio of the reachable effect according to the number of holdings and the like so as to enable the efficient progress of the game and appropriately give the player a sense of expectation.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the production with reach is performed, and finally the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a straight line that extends horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. You can On the other hand, in the case of reachable production in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20(d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as a winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as a winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the probability of winning is 1/10. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the hit random number value (see S1003) acquired upon the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value “0” of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when it is determined to be hit in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, similarly to the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 17(b)) for identifying the jackpot type in the special symbol lottery, a hit symbol random number for identifying the hit type in the ordinary symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200, by the random number acquisition unit 231, obtains the random number value of the hit symbol random number together with the random number value of the hit random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10), and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 obtains it. The type of winning is specified based on the random number value.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the percentage of the winning value, and each value of the winning value shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting a fluctuation pattern and a table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of a fluctuation pattern and a table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 21 shows an example of setting a low probability time-short gaming state. Although illustration is omitted, for other gaming states such as a high-probability time shortened gaming state, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is individually provided.
In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball wins the first starting opening 121. In the case where the game ball wins the second starting opening 122, a table for setting the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selecting process may be separately provided, or the game ball winning the first starting opening 121. The table to be referred to in some cases may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13). .. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number obtaining unit 231, matches with any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. The variation pattern is determined based on whether or not to perform. For example, when the jackpot pattern is “high probability pattern A” and the fluctuation pattern random number is “51”, it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range “50 to 69” assigned to “high probability pattern A” in FIG. 21. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, if the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out (in the case of No in S1302 of FIG. 13), based on the hold number U1, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number of the first special symbol lottery. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, if the number U1 of holding the first special symbol lottery is “0”, the reach random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231. , It is determined whether to be assigned to the reach random number range “0 to 21” or the reach random number range “22 to 249”, which is assigned to the number “0” of the “offset” reservation. When the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number value by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which of the fluctuation pattern random values assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is “51”, it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range “50 to 89”, so “PR4” is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200, the variation pattern random number value (see S903 and S910 of FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the starting openings 121 and 122, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the reach. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the presence or absence of the effect, conditions such as the number of holdings. Then, the information of the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as an effect at the time of special symbol change, an effect corresponding to the change time specified based on the change pattern information included in the change start command (executable in the change time) Is selected and executed.

[Structure of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the preliminary determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. 22A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in FIG. 22A.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum values of the number of holdings of the first starting opening 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting opening 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes the first storage unit 204a, the second storage unit 204b, the third storage unit 204c, the fourth storage unit 204d, the fifth storage unit 204e, the sixth storage unit 204f, and the seventh storage unit. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information indicating whether the winning start opening (first start opening 121 or second start opening 122) is stored. And an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing the pattern random number, an area for storing the reach random number, and an area for storing the variation pattern random number. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is sequentially stored from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when a random number is not stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. 23A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23A.
As shown in FIG. 23A, the RAM 303 includes a first pending storage area 305 and a second pending storage area 306 as a pending status storage area that stores a status in which pending balls are held. The first holding storage area 305 and the second holding storage area 306 correspond to holding for winning in the first starting opening 121 and holding for winning in the second starting opening 122, respectively. Have Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on/off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on/off the notification flag. And an area. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning in the first starting opening 121 is 3, the holding flags are turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to give a notice effect for each of the pending balls based on the preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to give advance notice effect based on the preliminary determination result in accordance with the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the notice effect is not performed. For example, in the case of performing the notice effect on the third reserved ball among the three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

Further, although not particularly shown, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter, referred to as a preliminary judgment information storage area) in which the preliminary judgment information is stored, separately from the configuration shown in FIG. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each random number described above. The content of the pre-determination information is similar to the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11 ), and specifically, whether or not a big hit (and whether or not a small hit), a big hit If it is, it is information for indicating the type of jackpot, the variation pattern (variation time) is the length at which the reach effect can be executed, or the content of the variation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is unique to the pre-judgment information together with the information (hereinafter referred to as “retention information”) about the suspension corresponding to the winning ball (retention ball) for which pre-determination processing has been performed. At a timing, it is included in the preliminary determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process according to the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 uses the same random number table as the configuration example of the random numbers described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is the high-probability state (S2401), and if it is determined to be the high-probability state (Yes in S2401), the high-probability state The table is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are preliminarily determined (S2402). On the other hand, when No is determined in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are preliminarily determined (S2403).

After the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number in S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether the game state is a time saving state (S2404), and if it is determined to be a time saving state (Yes in S2404), A table for the time saving state is selected and a reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2405). Further, the table for the time saving state is selected and the fluctuation pattern random number is preliminarily determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when No is determined in S2404, the table for time saving no state is selected and the reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2407). Furthermore, the table for time saving state is selected, and the random determination of the variation pattern is performed in advance (S2408).

After this, the game control unit 200, as a result of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the preliminary determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the preliminary determination of the reach random number, and the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern, It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control unit 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-described preliminary determination is a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball into the starting openings 121 and 122, and a determination table (see FIG. 20) used in the jackpot determination process. (See the reference) and a determination table having the same configuration as the above. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (S1108 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-described preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number, in addition to the jackpot determination processing, in order to determine a random number in the preliminary determination processing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the preliminary determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big hit determination, the determination table used for the big hit determination may be used for the preliminary determination.

In addition, here, only the pre-determination (whether or not a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery is described, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (pre-determination). I do. The variation pattern selection in the special symbol lottery is performed by the variation pattern selection random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the variation pattern table (FIG. 21) obtained in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the starting openings 121 and 122. (See S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, even in the pre-reading of the variation pattern, the random number value for selecting the variation pattern obtained at the time of winning and the pre-reading table having the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. The change pattern can be read ahead.

In this case, in order to prefetch the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as for the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the change pattern selection, the change pattern table used in the change pattern selection process of the special symbol process may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of control commands related to prefetching for selecting the variation pattern and suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, when the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, since the execution time of each process is different, the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time The determination result of the jackpot determination process may be different. That is, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (a high probability state or a low probability state, a time saving state or a time saving non-state) is changed by the time the special symbol variation starts. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used depending on the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination is different when the pre-determination process is executed and when the jackpot determination process is executed. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained at the time of winning in the starting openings 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may be different. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. Do not mind.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating that the door opening error has started, the effect control unit 300 displays a message such as “Call a staff member” or an image indicating an abnormal state on the image display unit. 114 is displayed. In addition, the production control unit 300 restricts the speaker 156 from outputting an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state and outputting a song, a voice, a sound effect, or the like. Moreover, the effect control unit 300 lights the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as a mode indicating an abnormal state.

In addition, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred. A mode in which a part is used may be used. Further, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when the door opening error of the area 020 in FIG. 24C occurs, all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Further, when a payout error in the area 021 in FIG. 24-3 occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that an error has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible for a clerk of a game store (pachinko hall) or the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in the game machine.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes a main process shown in FIG. 25(a) and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 25(b). Referring to FIG. 25(a), the effect control unit 300 first performs initial setting at startup (S2501), performs cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then follows the set cycle. While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), interrupt processing is accepted.

The interrupt process is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25B, in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command receiving process (S2511). In this command receiving process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. The effect control unit 300 also performs effect button processing for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 or the like by the player (S2512). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). Thereby, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, operation of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 of FIG. 25B).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not a pre-determination result command and a hold number increase command have been received (S2601). The pre-judgment result command and the hold number increase command are set in the game opening control process shown in FIG. 9 in the game control unit 200 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process shown in FIG. 8 (S806). ) Is a command transmitted to the production control unit 300.
When the effect control unit 300 determines that the advance determination result command and the hold number increase command are received (Yes in S2601), the hold number value stored in the RAM 303 is incremented by 1 (S2602). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the preliminary determination effect selection process based on the preliminary determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is neither the pre-determination result command nor the hold number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation start command (S2604). This variation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is a variation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes effect selection processing (S2605). When the variation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-judgment result command, the hold number increase command, or the fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the fluctuation stop command (S2606). This variation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the variation stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control unit 300 executes the variation effect ending process (S2607). In the variation effect ending process, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

When the received command is not the pre-judgment result command, the hold number increase command, the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604 and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is the opening command for performing the operation (S2608). This opening command is a command that was set in the process during stop shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selecting process (S2609). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-judgment result command, the hold number increase command, the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation stop command, and the opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606 and S2608), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is an ending command for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command set in the special winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2611). Details of the ending effect selection processing will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-judgment result command, the hold number increase command, the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation stop command, the opening command and the ending command (S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608 and S2610 No), then the effect control unit 300 A customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG.
In the preliminary determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the preliminary determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the production control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (advance judgment effect pattern) to be used in the effect determination in advance, based on the prior determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-determination effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided to give advance notice of the determination result of the random number by the special symbol process before the start of the variation based on the determination result of the random number by the special symbol process. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect and a continuous notice effect can be provided as a preliminary determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a holding ball occurs, a display indicating the number of holding balls is displayed on the first special symbol holding display device 218 and the second special symbol holding display device 219 of the display device 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, a hold display indicating the occurrence of the hold and the number of holds is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, by reflecting the preliminary determination result in the display mode of the hold display and the like, with respect to the hold ball, the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing is given to the player. It can be a pre-determination effect to suggest.

Although the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-determination effect has been described here, a variety of notice effects can be obtained by reflecting the effect on various effects performed before the start of the variation based on the determination result of the random number by the special symbol process. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect caused by the light emission of the panel lamp 116 or the frame lamp 157, an effect caused by the operation of a movable accessory, an effect caused by the acoustic output of a music or a sound effect, and the like in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

In addition, the pre-determination effect is executed along with the symbol variation for the other winning balls that is performed before the symbol variation for the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is four per one starting opening (first starting opening 121 or second starting opening 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, the digestion of the reserved ball in the second starting port 122 is prioritized. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a holding ball having the second starting opening 122, before the design variation for the holding ball is performed, the variation currently being changed (referred to as the variation) is included, A maximum of four winning balls will be subject to symbol variations. In the notice production related to the reserved ball that has been preliminarily determined, if the design variation is performed a plurality of times before the design variation of the reserve ball is performed, the notice production over the plurality of symbol variations (continuous notice production ) May go.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets, in the RAM 303, a hold number command including the value of the hold number after the addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected preliminary determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output an image or sound corresponding to the selected preliminary determination effect pattern. The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data for representing the selected preliminary judgment effect pattern from the CGROM 315 or the SNDROM 316 based on the display list or the like, and expresses the preliminary judgment effect using the image display unit 114 or the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 is decremented by 1 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (type of jackpot, game state after jackpot game, variation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the variation start command. The variation effect pattern of the symbol variation by the image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the effect control unit 300 sets a variable effect start command instructing the start of execution of the selected effect in the RAM 303 (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the selected variation effect pattern to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. Upon receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output an image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern. The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data for representing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 or the SNDROM 316 based on the display list or the like, and expresses the variation effect using the image display unit 114 or the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variation effect pattern determined here, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the notice effect, and the like are determined. The variable display of the decorative symbol is an effect display performed on the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbol performed on the first special symbol indicator 221 or the second special symbol indicator 222. In this variable display of the decorative pattern, reach effect or the like is executed. Unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25A). Alternatively, the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery using (obtaining the effect random number value when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3001) and selects the effect pattern (jackpot effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect by the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303 together with these data, The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the effect during the big hit is determined. In addition, in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), the determination may be performed based on the random number value acquired when the command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the content of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG.
In the ending effect selection processing, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3101), and selects the effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303 together with these data, The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In addition, in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), the determination may be performed based on the random number value acquired when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The production control unit 300 determines whether or not the customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, when the received command is not the customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

When the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S3204 or after being turned ON in S3203), the effect control unit 300 next determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). Is determined (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206) and issues the customer waiting effect command for performing the customer waiting effect (demo effect) to the RAM 303. To end the customer waiting command reception process (S3207).

When the command receiving process is completed as described above, any one of a variation effect start command, a variation effect end command, a jackpot effect start command, an ending effect start command, and a customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (S2512 of FIG. 25B).
In the effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the player operates the operation buttons 161 and the like during a predetermined reception period (effective period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key of the effect key 162 or peripheral keys to turn it on. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device such as a touch panel or the like other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, it includes that the operation of the device is detected. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

When the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets the effect button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button processing. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) of FIG. 25(b) to execute the command set in the RAM 303 by the command reception process and the effect button process described above to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, output a sound, operate the movable accessory 115, and emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157. Is controlled to execute the set effect.

[Variable production pattern table]
32 and 33 are diagrams showing a setting example of a variation effect pattern and a table used in the variation effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27(b). Note that FIG. 32 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low-probability time short non-gaming state, and FIG. 33 shows a variation performance pattern table for small hits and out-of-range in the low probability short time no-gaming state.

A plurality of variation effect patterns are set in the jackpot variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 32. With respect to the variation patterns “PA1” to “PA6”, “PB1” to “PB14”, and “PC1 to PC2” set using the above FIG. 21, variation effect patterns “EA1” to “EA6”, “ "EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated one to one.
In addition, a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are set in the fluctuation effect pattern table for small hits and outs shown in FIG. With respect to the variation patterns “PD1 to PD2” and “PR1” to “PR10” set using FIG. 21, the variation effect patterns “ES1 to ES2” and “ER1” to “ER10” are one-to-one. It is associated.

Here, the variable effect is an effect for effectually informing the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not it has been a big hit) by variably displaying the decorative symbol and then stopping the display.
Further, in the illustrated variable effect pattern, "pseudo continuous number", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach" and "stop symbol" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the “pseudo continuous number of times” is the number of times of pseudo continuous production (pseudo continuous). This pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which, in the variable display for one variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed as if the variable display for the plurality of times is performed. In the pseudo continuous production, the production control unit 300 temporarily changes the decorative design after changing the decorative design before changing to the reach state, and then starts the variable display of the decorative design again. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated a set number of times of the pseudo-consecution, and then the fixed stop is performed, whereby one variation of the special symbol Finish changing display. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo stop state in which the decorative design seems to be stopped at first glance, but the design actually fluctuates slightly. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is a state in which the fluctuation is treated as continuing in game control. Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol refers to a state in which it is fixed as a stop symbol in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, 0 to 3 times. Further, the pseudo continuous number is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a degree of expecting a big hit. In other words, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous times, the higher the degree of expectation.

“Normal” indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
“SP reach” indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of “SP1”, “SP2”, and “SP3” is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of “SP1”, “SP2”, and “SP3”, the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation is set.

“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of “SPSP1”, “SPSP2”, and “SPSP3”, the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation is set.

“Stop symbol” indicates a combination of decorative symbols displayed as a stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the types of the stop symbols are "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5", and the like. In the illustrated example, the stop symbol type is set according to the jackpot type. For example, in the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B, which are jackpots that are in a low-probability state after the jackpot, “444” and “666”, which are even stop symbols, are set. Further, in the high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol C, which are the jackpots that are in the high-probability state after the jackpot, odd-numbered stop symbols “777” and “111” are set.

Now, the effect control unit 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. 32. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a change effect pattern corresponding to the change pattern set in the change pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG. 32.
For example, in FIG. 32, when the "big hit symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variation effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo continuous number" is "-", that is, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "Normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP Reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP Reach".

[Direction image]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
As shown in FIG. 34, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56.
Below, each above-mentioned production image is explained.

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are individually described, the symbol arranged on the left side is "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is "middle decorative symbol 41", the right side The pattern arranged in the above is referred to as a "right decorative pattern 41". Further, when the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as “left and right decorative design 41”.

The decorative pattern 41 of the present embodiment is composed of a combination of a plurality of image elements. In the present embodiment, as the image elements that can form the decorative pattern 41, a number element 411 that indicates a number, a number decoration element 412 that decorates the number element 411, and a character element 413 that indicates a character are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, as a part of the character element 413, a shimmering image (a so-called aura) around the character is displayed.

In the variable effect of the decorative design 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative designs 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling, and then temporarily stops the left decorative design 41 (for example, the number “1”), Next, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination “213” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 34(1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. In addition, the decorative design 41 in which three pieces are not arranged in this way is referred to as a decorative design 41 at the edge. The area in which the left decorative design 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114 is an example of the first area. The area in which the right decorative design 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114 is an example of the second area. The area in which the middle decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114 is an example of the third area.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like) on the image display unit 114 is changing the special symbol (during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41). The fluctuation image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image relating to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variation image 51 is displayed in an area where the variation image 51 is displayed at the start of variation display of the special symbol (the lower center portion in the display area of the image display unit 114 in the example shown), and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. In addition, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing. In addition, the variation image 51 is, for example, based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing when the display mode of the color, the pattern, the shape, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as “color etc.”) is changed, and the expectation degree of the jackpot is won. To inform or suggest.

[Holding image 52]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the hold image 52 is an image showing that the right of the jackpot determination is held. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing.
In addition, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

Further, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the expectation level of the jackpot based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, by changing the display mode such as the color. Furthermore, when the pre-judgment result of the pre-judgment processing is a big hit, the kind of color or the like having a higher degree of expectation is set to be displayed than in the case of a big hit. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expected degree may be set higher in this order.

Here, as described above, a maximum of four reservations are generated due to the winning in the first starting opening 121. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning in the first starting opening 121. In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed in an area on the right side of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position away from the variable image 51, that is, from the left side to the right side. It

Although illustration is omitted, a maximum of four withdrawals also occur due to winning at the second starting opening 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning in the second starting opening 122.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form.

Further, in the following description, regarding the maximum four retained images 52 displayed, the “first retained image 52 ”, the “second retained image 52 ”, and the “third retained image 52 ”are respectively arranged in order from the variable image 51. These may be referred to as "held image 52" and "fourth held image 52".

[Holding number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays the number-of-holdings display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the holding balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the held images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of held winnings to the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122, respectively.

[Fourth design 56]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 etc.). The fourth symbol 56 is displayed, which indicates that the variation (decorative display of the decorative symbol 41) is in progress. The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300, and is displayed in a different mode depending on the change and stop of the special symbol.
Note that, for each of the three symbols constituting the fourth symbol 56, when individually explained, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left fourth symbol 56", and the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle fourth symbol 56". The symbol arranged on the right side is referred to as a "right fourth symbol 56". Further, when the left fourth symbol 56 and the right fourth symbol 56 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right fourth symbols 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth symbols 56 are three images corresponding to the decorative symbols 41, respectively, and are displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The fourth design 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller size than the decorative design 41. As will be described later, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the fourth pattern 56 is low in decorative property. It is displayed in the display mode.

The fourth symbol 56 is displayed (for example, vertical scrolling) in a mode that indicates that the special symbol is changing with the winning in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122. Then, the fourth symbol 56 is stopped together with the fluctuation stop of the special symbol. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the fourth symbol 56 that is stopped and displayed matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. To further explain, in the example of FIG. 34(1), a number corresponding to "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56.

[Variation example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is a variation effect example of the decorative symbol 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the effect control unit 300 has fixedly stopped the decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness in the image display unit 114 with the end of the variation of the previous special symbol. And Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed on the image display unit 114.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Thus, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 52 move toward the position where the variable image 51 is displayed. Further, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the number-of-holds display 55 is switched from "4" to "3".
In the drawings, when it is shown that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Subsequently, the left decorative design 41 is temporarily changed at a position which has been fixedly stopped until the start of change, as shown in FIG. 34(4), after being changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. 34(3). It The left decorative pattern 41 operates when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 (the number "4") raises the right hand when it is temporarily stopped. In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, in order to make it easy to understand, it is expressed in the vicinity of the decorative pattern 41 by using a display similar to a double quotation mark.
Subsequently, the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped at the position which was fixedly stopped until the start of change, as shown in FIG. 34(6), after being changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. 34(5). It The right decorative pattern 41 operates when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the right decorative pattern 41 (the numeral "1") raises the right hand when it is temporarily stopped.

When the left and right decorative patterns 41 are provisionally stopped, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 34(7), it is fixedly stopped until the change starts. It is temporarily stopped at the position. The middle decorative pattern 41 operates when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the middle decoration pattern 41 (the number "2") raises the right hand when it is temporarily stopped.
When the medium decorative design is temporarily stopped, the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then, as the special design fluctuates and stop, as shown in FIG. Be stopped. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 34(8) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. Also, with the variation stop of the special symbol, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped.

As described above, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and finally fixed at the position (variation start position) when the variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the variation of the next decorative design 41 without moving the temporary design or the final design stop of the decorative design 41 to the variation start position.
In addition, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen deeper than the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time of fluctuation, temporary stop, and final stop. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed, temporarily stopped, and finally stopped in a state in which the middle decorative pattern 41 is stacked on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.

[Variation example 2]
35 to 37 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the effect mode according to the game state is provided. Specifically, an A mode is provided as an effect mode in the low-probability time saving game state, and a B mode is provided as an effect mode in the high-probability time saving game state.
In the A mode, as shown in FIG. 35(A-1), a decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness is used. As shown in FIG. 35(A-2), the number-of-holdings display 55 is switched from "1" to "0" as the decorative pattern 41 starts to change. Further, after the variation of the decorative design 41 is started, the left decorative design 41 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) is changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. As shown in -4), the vehicle is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(A-5), the right decorative pattern 41 (the numeral "4" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position. As a result, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 that have been temporarily stopped are aligned to form a reach, and reach production is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the reach is established, the reach-time installation drawing effect, which is an effect using the decorative pattern 41, is performed.

When the reach is established, as the reach-time diagram effect, as shown in FIG. 36(A-6), a character pattern enlarged display effect is performed in which the character elements 413 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 with high decorativeness are enlarged and displayed. .. Specifically, when the reach is established, the display area of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the image display unit 114 becomes wider than that before the reach is established. On the other hand, the numeral elements 411 and the numeral decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not displayed in an enlarged manner even if the reach is established.

Further, as the reach-time mounting drawing effect, a separation effect in which the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are separated from each other is performed. More specifically, when the reach is established, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move in a direction away from each other. More specifically, the left decorative design 41 is right next to the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the left, and the right decorative design 41 is right next to the display area of the image display 114 and moves to the right. To do. In other words, the left and right decorative designs 41 move in a direction away from the middle decorative design 41. In this fluctuating effect, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move in a direction of separating from each other while expanding when the reach is established.

When the separation effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 36(A-7), the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the left end portion in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative pattern 41 of the image display unit 114. Move to the right edge of the display area. Hereinafter, the display position after the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moved by the separation effect is referred to as a separation position.

When the separation effect is performed, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are reduced and displayed. Specifically, when the separation effect is performed, the display area of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the image display unit 114 becomes narrow. In the illustrated example, the display size of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative designs 41 has returned to the display size before the reach was established.
Further, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed in such a manner that a part thereof can be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Specifically, the character element 413 of the left decorative design 41 is cut off from the tip on the left side of the display area of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, a part of the aura of the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right hand are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the tip on the right side of the display area of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, a part of the aura of the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 and the back hair are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the numeral elements 411 and the numeral decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are contained in the display area of the image display unit 114.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(A-8), the medium decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed in front of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Further, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed by a display size larger than each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed in a manner that the display area in the image display unit 114 is wider than that of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Specifically, the numerical element 411 of the middle decorative pattern 41 has a wider display area than each of the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41, and the numeral decorative element 412 of the middle decorative pattern 41 is of the left and right decorative patterns 41. The display area is wider than each of the numeral decoration elements 412, and the character element 413 of the middle decoration pattern 41 has a larger display area than each of the character elements 413 of the left and right decoration patterns 41.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37(A-9), the middle decorative pattern 41 (the numeral "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen in front of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In other words, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41.

When the decorative pattern 41 on the outset side is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 37(A-10), the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 of the decorative design 41 on the outboard side move toward each other. The displayed approach display effect is performed. More specifically, an operation of moving the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 toward each other is performed. More specifically, the left decorative design 41 is right next to the display area of the image display unit 114 and an operation of moving to the right is performed, and the right decorative design 41 is right next to the display area of the image display unit 114 and left. To move to. In other words, the operation of moving the left and right decorative designs 41 toward the middle decorative design 41 is performed. As a result, the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the variation start position. Then, the left and right decorative patterns 41 come to fit in the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the middle decoration pattern 41 is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the display area in the image display unit 114 of the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413 of the middle decoration pattern 41 becomes smaller than that when the middle decoration pattern 41 is changed at a low speed. .. In the illustrated example, the display size of the middle-decoration pattern 41 is the same as the display size of the middle-decoration pattern 41 (see FIG. 35(A-1)) at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, in this variation effect, the middle decoration symbol 41 is reduced and displayed while the approach display effect is being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 37(A-11), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped with the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41.

On the other hand, in the B mode, as shown in FIG. 35(B-1), a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used. Numerical elements 411 and numeral decorative elements 412 are provided as image elements capable of forming the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode. On the other hand, the character element 413 is not provided as an image element capable of forming the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode. The display size of the numerical element 411 of the decorative design 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the numerical element 411 of the decorative design 41 used in the A mode. Further, the display size of the number decorative element 412 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the number decorative element 412 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the A mode.

Further, a right-handed image 79 is displayed on the image display unit 114, and it is notified that the player is in a so-called right-handed state, which is advantageous for the player by right-handing. In addition, the variation pedestal of the variation image 51 is switched to the display mode before the jackpot game (for example, see FIG. 34(1)) along with the transition of the gaming state to the high-probability time shortening gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 35(B-2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35(B-3), the left decorative design 41 (the numeral "4" in the illustrated example). Is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35(B-4), the right decorative design 41 (the numeral "4" in the illustrated example) swings up and down, and the same right decorative design 41 as the left decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped. Reach-inspired production is performed to incite that there is a possibility that it will be done. In this reach-inspiring effect, the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed. Specifically, in the reach fanning effect, the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative designs 41 is wider than the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach fanning effect. Further, in the reach fanning effect, the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative designs 41 is larger than the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative designs 41 before the reach fanning effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(B-5), the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are aligned and the reach effect is executed. Here, also in the B mode, when the reach is established, the reach-time packaging effect, which is an effect using the decorative design 41, is performed.
When the reach is established, a numerical enlarged display effect in which the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed is performed as the reach time schematic drawing effect. Specifically, when the reach is established, the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider than the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time of reach-inspiring production. .. When the reach is established, the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider than the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time of reach-inspiring production. Further, since the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed, the distance between the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 becomes shorter than that before the reach is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B-6), the three decorative patterns 41 are hidden after the transition effect in which the transition image 60 is displayed. As the transition effect, for example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden by temporarily turning the screen of the image display unit 114 white (white out) or turning black (black out). You can
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(B-7), the SP reach production is developed. In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed as the SP reach effect. The SP reach effect image 61 is an image in which a character eating food (inadvertently Sanbei) is drawn.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B-8), the outfall suggestion image 62 suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be out of touch, specifically, the character (inadvertently Sanbei) ate. An image is displayed indicating that the food was not delicious.
Subsequently, through the transition effect shown in FIG. 37(B-9), the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 37(B-10). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is returned to the display size before the reach-inspiring effect, that is, the display size at the start of the fluctuation. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is displayed at the variation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(B-11), after the temporarily stopped three decorative designs 41 are illuminated, the three decorative designs 41 are displayed as shown in FIG. 37(B-12). Is fixedly stopped.

As described above, in the variation effect example 2, in the B mode, after the reach is established, the number enlarged display effect is performed. On the other hand, in the A mode, the enlarged number display effect is not performed after the reach is established. Here, in the A mode, the area where the effect images other than the numerical elements 411 such as the character element 413 can be displayed is widened because the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged and displayed after the reach. Further, in the B mode, since the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed after the reach, it is possible to give an impression to the player which design the reach is established with. That is, depending on the mode (game state), the effect of focusing on the effect image other than the numerical elements 411 of the decorative pattern 41 and the effect of giving the player an impression as to which decorative pattern 41 is aligned and the reach is established. You can switch.

Further, in variation effect example 2, in A mode, when the decorative pattern 41 on the outset is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach display effect is performed, and the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier is displayed at the variation start position. It On the other hand, in the B mode, when the decorative design 41 on the outset is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach design is not performed and the decorative design 41 on the outset is displayed at the variation start position.

Here, when the approach display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player comes to pay attention to the left and right decorative symbols 41 that operate. The left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 approach each other by the operation of the left and right decorative patterns 41 toward the middle decorative pattern 41, so that the player can combine any of the three decorative patterns 41 into the decorative pattern 41. It becomes easier to recognize whether or not it was displayed.
On the other hand, in the high-probability time saving game state in which the variation effect by the B mode is performed, as compared with the low-probability time saving game state, the player can easily expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, After the reach is established, if the decorative pattern 41 on the gap is temporarily stopped, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if the player draws a close-up display effect and pays attention to the decorative design 41 of the outlier, the player's interest may be reduced.

Therefore, in the high-probability time shortening game state, when the decorative design 41 on the outlier is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach display effect is not performed so that the player does not pay attention to the decorative design 41 on the outlier. In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect in which the player pays attention to the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier according to the game state.
In the B mode, the approach display effect is not performed, but in the state where the decorative design 41 of the outlier is displayed at the variation start position, the temporary stop and the final stop of the decorative design 41 of the outlier are performed, The next fluctuation can be started smoothly.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, in the A mode, the number enlarged display effect is not performed after the reach is established (0%), and in the B mode, the number enlarged display effect is always performed after the reach is established (100%). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, after the reach is established, the numerical enlarged display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in the B mode, after the reach is established, the number enlarged display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled with a higher probability than the A mode so that the number enlarged display effect is performed. In other words, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled so that it is easier to perform the numerical enlarged display effect after the reach is established than in the A mode. Here, in the B mode, it is easier to perform the number enlarged display effect after the reach is established in the B mode than in the A mode. For the B mode, the number enlarged display effect is always performed after the reach is established (100%), and in the A mode, the reach number is displayed. It also includes not performing the number enlarged display effect after establishment (0%).

In addition, the numerical element 411 is regarded as a specific identification element for identifying the design of the decorative design 41. That is, in the present embodiment, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled so that the specific identification element can be displayed in an enlarged manner more easily after the reach is established than in the A mode. In addition, when performing the number enlarged display effect, the number decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged.

Further, in variation effect example 2, in the A mode, the reach-inspiring effect, that is, without enlarging the number elements 411 in the left and right decorative designs 41 before the reach is established (0%), in the B mode, the reach effect is displayed. The numerical elements 411 in the left and right decorative designs 41 are always displayed in an enlarged manner (100%) before being established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, the reach-inspiring effect, that is, the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative designs 41 may be enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability before the reach is established. Further, in the B mode, the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 do not have to be enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability before the reach is established. However, with a higher probability in the B mode than in the A mode, control is performed so that the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged before the reach is established. In other words, the B mode is controlled so that the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 can be easily expanded before the reach is established, as compared with the A mode. Here, in the B mode, it is easier to expand the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach is established than in the A mode. For the B mode, the number elements in the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach is established. 411 is necessarily enlarged and displayed (100%), and in A mode, it is also included that the number elements 411 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged and displayed (0%) before the reach is established.
It should be noted that the number decoration element 412 may or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner when performing the reach-inspiring effect.

Further, in the fluctuating effect example 2, both the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner as the reach-inspiring effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be enlarged and displayed, and the other may not be enlarged. Further, for example, both the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be displayed in an enlarged manner, and either one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be displayed in a larger scale than the other.

Further, in variation effect example 2, if the decorative design 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the A mode, the approach display effect is always performed (100%), and the reach is established in the B mode. Although the approach display effect is not performed (0%) when the decorative pattern 41 of the trailing edge is temporarily stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the decorative pattern 41 at the gap after the reach is established in the A mode is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, even in the case where the decorative pattern 41 on the gap is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the B mode, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative design 41 of the gap after the reach is established, the approach display effect is controlled so that the A mode has a higher probability than the B mode. In other words, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 of the gap after the reach is established, the control is performed so that the A mode is easier to approach the display effect than the B mode. Here, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative design 41 of the deviation after the reach is established, the A mode is easier to approach than the B mode and the display effect is that the decorative design of the deviation is established after the reach is established in the A mode. When the 41 is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect is always performed (100%), and when the decorative pattern 41 of the gap after the reach is established in the B mode is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect is not performed (0%). It is also included.

[Variation effect example 3]
38 to 40 are diagrams showing an aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.
Similarly to the variation effect example 2, the variation effect example 3 is provided with an A mode as an effect mode in the low-probability time/short game state and a B mode as the effect mode in the high-probability time/short game state.

In the A mode, first, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-8). Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(A-1), the effect button image 63 imitating the effect button 161 is displayed during the variable display of the middle decoration pattern 41.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 goes through the transition effect shown in FIG. 38(A-2) and then as shown in FIG. 38(A-3). Then, the image is moved to the upper side in the display area of the image display unit 114 while being reduced. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is provided with the numeral element 411 and the numeral decorative element 412, but is not provided with the character element 413. Further, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden.
Then, it develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach front stage image 64 is displayed. This SP reach front image 64 is an image in which a character (inadvertently Sanbei) who cooks is drawn.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38(A-4), the SP reach effect image 61 and the effect button image 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39(A-5). The cut-in image 65 is an image in which a scene in which a character (Yujichi of the windmill) appears as a food assistant is drawn. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are hidden.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39(A-6), the SPSP reach pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. The SPSP reach front stage image 66 is an image in which a scene in which Sunbei and Yuchi of the windmill cooperate to cook food is drawn.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(A-7), the SPSP reach latter stage image 67 is displayed. This SPSP reach latter-stage image 67 is an image depicting a scene in which Sanbei and Yuchi, a windmill, inadvertently eat food. At this time, another effect button image 68 different from the effect button image 63 is displayed. In addition, at this time, the effect button 161 projects in a manner similar to the other effect button images 68.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 39(A-8). The jackpot suggestion image 69 is displayed. This jackpot suggestion image 69 is an image showing that the food that was inadvertently eaten by Sanbei and Yushichi the windmill was delicious.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(A-9), three decorative symbols 41 having high decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in a combination of “444”. Specifically, each of the three decorative symbols 41 is displayed with a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 enlarged by the character symbol enlarged display effect. At this time, a part of the left decorative pattern 41 and a part of the right decorative pattern 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the middle decoration is more than the display area of each of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41. The display area of the symbol 41 is wider.
Note that the decorative pattern 41 in which all three are arranged is hereinafter referred to as a double-sided decorative pattern 41.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40(A-10), the decorative design 41 of the doublet pattern is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the display size of each of the decorative designs 41 of the doublet returns to the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 before the reach is established. Further, at this time, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move in a direction in which they approach each other. Thereby, the decorative design 41 of the doublet returns to the variation start position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(A-11), after the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative design 41 of the doublet eyes is performed, as shown in FIG. 40(A-12), the doublet decorative pattern. 41 is fixedly stopped. In addition, the fourth design 56 is also stopped with the fixed stop of the decorative design 41 of the doublet. The combination "444" of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in a stopped state shown in FIG. 40(A-12) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the B mode, first, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35(B-1) to 35(B-4), 36(B-5) and 36(B-6). A performance is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-1), the SP reach effect is developed. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach front stage image 64 is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-2), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 38(B-3), the second result suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. The jackpot suggestion image 70 is displayed. The second jackpot suggestion image 70 is an image showing that the dish that Sabeye carelessly ate was delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-4), three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in a combination of "444". Specifically, each of the three decorative patterns 41 is displayed with a display size larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the reach is established. At this time, a part of the left decorative pattern 41 and a part of the right decorative pattern 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is more than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41. The display area of is wider.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39(B-5), the decorative design 41 of the doublet pattern is reduced and displayed. The display size of each of the decorative patterns 41 of the doublet pattern at this time is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 that has been definitely stopped (see FIG. 35(B-1)). Further, at this time, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move in a direction in which they approach each other. The double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 39(B-6), after the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative design 41 of the doublet eyes is performed, as shown in FIG. 39(B-7), the decorative pattern of doublet eyes. 41 is fixedly stopped. In addition, the fourth design 56 is also stopped with the finalization of the decorative design 41 of the doublet.

As described above, in the fluctuating effect example 3, the decorative design 41 of the doublet eyes is displayed in a larger size than the display size before the reach is established in both the A mode and the B mode. As a result, it is possible to produce an impactful effect using the double-sided decorative pattern 41.
In both cases of the A mode and the B mode, the decorative design 41 of the doublet pattern is enlarged and then reduced and displayed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other (see FIG. 39(B-5) and FIG. 40(A-10)). As a result, the player can be more strongly impressed that the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned.

In the variation effect example 3, it has been described that in the A mode, the enlarged decorative pattern 41 of the doublet eyes returns to the variation start position while being reduced and displayed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged and double-decorated decorative pattern 41 being reduced, the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position, and the light emission effect of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed at this position. And the fixed stop may be performed.
Further, in the B mode, it has been described that the enlarged decorative pattern 41 of the doublet eyes is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position as a result of the reduced display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged and double-decorated decorative pattern 41 being reduced, the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the variation start position, and at this position, the light emission effect of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 and the fixed stop are performed. May be done.

In variation effect example 3, in A mode, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 reduced and displayed after the enlarged display is returned to the respective display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 reduced and displayed after the enlarged display may be larger than the respective display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach is established.
Further, in the B mode, it has been described that the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 reduced and displayed after the enlarged display is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 that has been fixedly stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. For example, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 that is reduced and displayed after the enlarged display may be returned to the display size of the decorative pattern 41 that has been definitely stopped.

[Variation example 4]
41 to 43 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the low-probability time shortening non-gaming state will be described. Further, in the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 3 will be mainly described, and the description that is the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 3 may be omitted.

First, after the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and 36(A-5) to 36(A-7) is performed. As shown in FIG. 41(1), the middle decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the same manner as the effect described with reference to FIG. 36(A-8).
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41(2), the effect button image 63 may be displayed during the variable display of the middle decoration pattern 41.

When the player operates the effect button 161 when the effect button image 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 42(2) (FIG. 41(2)), as shown in FIG. 42(4), a special symbol A second out-of-focus suggestion image 74 indicating that the lottery result of the lottery may be out of order is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42(5), the decorative pattern 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP reach effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42(6), the approach display effect is performed. Further, at this time, the middle decoration pattern 41 is reduced and displayed. The decorative pattern 41 of the off-set is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and then the decorative pattern 41 of the off-set is definitely stopped as shown in FIG. 42(7). The effect described with reference to FIGS. 42(6) and 42(7) is the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 37(A-10) and 37(A-11).

Further, after the variable display of the middle symbol 41 shown in FIG. 41(1) is performed, a transition effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 41(3). Then, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper side in the display area of the image display unit 114 while reducing, as shown in FIG. 43(8), through the transition effect shown in FIG. 43(3) (FIG. 41(3)). To do. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is provided with the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, that is, the number element 411 and the number decorative element 412, while the character element 413 is provided. There is no decorative pattern 41.
It also develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach front stage image 64 is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43(9), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. At this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 projects in a manner similar to the other effect button images 68. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, the detachment suggestion image 62 is displayed as shown in FIG. 43(10). At this time, the low-decoration medium-decoration pattern 41 (the numeral "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 41 has a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41.

Subsequently, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a state of being switched to a highly decorative aspect as shown in FIG. 43(12) through the transition effect shown in FIG. 43(11), and is temporarily displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Be stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 before the character design enlarged display effect. At this time, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display unit 114 have returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are returned to the variation start position without the approach display effect being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(13), the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43(14), the decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is definitely stopped. To be done.

As described above, in the variation effect example 4, after the reach is established, when the decorative design 41 of the gap is temporarily stopped without developing to the SP reach effect, the approach display effect is performed and the left and right decorative designs 41 are performed. The display position of is returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. On the other hand, when the SP reach production is developed after the reach is established and thereafter the decorative design 41 at the offset is temporarily stopped, the display positions of the left and right decorative designs 41 are separated from each other without the approach display production being performed. Has returned to the fluctuation start position.

Here, when the approach display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player comes to pay attention to the left and right decorative symbols 41 that operate. The left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 approach each other by the operation of the left and right decorative patterns 41 toward the middle decorative pattern 41, so that the player can combine any of the three decorative patterns 41 into the decorative pattern 41. It becomes easier to recognize whether or not it was displayed.
On the other hand, when the SP reach production is developed in the variation production, the decorative design 41 of the outlier is provided because the player can easily expect that the lottery result of the special design lottery is a big hit compared to the case where the SP reach production is not developed. When displayed, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if the player draws a close-up display effect and pays attention to the decorative design 41 of the outlier, the player's interest may be reduced.

Therefore, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier after the development to the SP reach effect, by not performing the approach display effect, the player is prevented from paying attention to the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier. , It suppresses the decrease in the interest of the player. In other words, in the present embodiment, whether or not to perform an effect in which the player focuses on the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier can be switched depending on whether or not the SP reach effect is developed.
It should be noted that when the reach is established, the SP reach production is developed, and thereafter, when the decorative design 41 at the staggered position is temporarily stopped, the approach display production is not performed, but the left and right decorative designs 41 are moved from the separated position to the variation start position. By returning to, the next fluctuation can be started smoothly.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, when the reach decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped without being developed into the SP reach effect after the reach is established, the approach display effect is always performed (100%). .. In addition, when the SP reach production is developed after the reach is established, and thereafter, the decorative design 41 at the offset is temporarily stopped, the approach display production is not performed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even when the decorative design 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped without the SP reach effect being developed after the reach is established, the approach display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, even if the SP reach effect is developed after the reach is established and then the decorative design 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 on the gap is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach display effect production is performed with a higher probability in the case where the SP reach effect is not developed than in the case where the SP reach effect is developed. To control. In other words, in the case where the decorative design 41 on the outlier side is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach display effect is easier to perform in the case where the SP reach effect is not developed than in the case where the SP reach effect is developed. Control. Here, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 on the gap after the reach is established is temporarily stopped, it is easier to perform the approach display effect when the SP reach effect is not developed than when the SP reach effect is developed. , If the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established, the approach display effect is always performed (100%), and if the SP reach effect is reached after the reach is established, the approach display effect is not performed (0%). included.

In addition, in the variation effect example 4, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed (see FIG. 42(2)), the second outlying suggestion image 74 (FIG. 42(4)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, but is not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the jackpot suggestion image 69 (see FIG. 39(A-3)) may be displayed. That is, at the first timing in the fluctuating effect, the first winning effect that selectively displays one of the second deviation suggestion image 74 and the jackpot suggestion image 69 based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is performed. May be.
Further, when the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is displayed (see FIG. 43(9)), the detachment suggestion image 62 (see FIG. 43(10)) is displayed. , But is not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is displayed, the second jackpot suggestion image 70 (see FIG. 38(B-3)) may be displayed. That is, at the second timing after the first timing in the fluctuating effect, either one of the display of the deviation suggestion image 62 and the display of the second jackpot suggestion image 70 is selectively selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. A second winning effect may be performed.

Further, the effect button image 63 is displayed when performing the first winning effect, and the other effect button image 68 is displayed when performing the second winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when performing the first winning effect, another effect button image 68 may be displayed instead of the effect button image 63. In addition, when performing the second winning effect, the effect button image 63 may be displayed instead of the other effect button image 68. However, when the first winning effect is performed, the effect button image 63 is controlled to be displayed more easily than when the second winning effect is performed. In other words, when the second winning effect is performed, it is controlled so that the other effect button image 68 can be displayed more easily than when the first winning effect is performed.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, it has been described that the case of developing to the SP reach effect is longer than the case of not developing to the SP reach effect after the reach is established, because the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the far end is longer. , But is not limited to this.
For example, depending on the fluctuating effect, in the case where the SP reach effect does not develop after the reach is established, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the far end may be longer than in the case where the SP reach effect develops. However, in the case of developing to SP reach production, with a higher probability than in the case of not developing to SP reach production after the reach is established, control is performed so that the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier becomes longer. In other words, in the case where the SP reach production is developed, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is controlled to be longer than in the case where the SP reach production is not developed after the reach is established.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the time for temporary stop of the decorative design 41 at the outlier is longer in the case of developing to the SP reach production than in the case of not reaching as in the variation production example 1. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, depending on the variation effect, the time when the reach is not established may be longer than the case where the reach effect is developed, and the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is longer. However, in the case where the SP reach effect is developed, it is controlled with a higher probability than in the case where the reach is not established, so that the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier becomes longer. In other words, in the case where the SP reach effect is developed, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is controlled to be longer than in the case where the reach is not established.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, when the SP reach effect is developed, the three decorative symbols 41 are always illuminated (100%), and when the reach is not achieved, the SP reach effect is not changed to three. Although it has been described that the decorative pattern 41 does not emit light, the invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established, the light emission effect of the three decorative patterns 41 may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, when the SP reach effect is developed, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, control is performed so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed with a higher probability when the SP reach effect is developed after the reach is established, than when the SP reach effect is not developed. In other words, control is performed so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is more easily performed when the SP reach effect is developed than when the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is described that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is not performed when the reach is not established as in the variation effect example 1, but the invention is not limited to this and the reach is not established. In this case, the light emission effect of the three decorative patterns 41 may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the control is performed so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed with a higher probability when the SP reach effect is developed than when the reach is not established. In other words, control is performed so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is more easily performed when the SP reach effect is developed than when the reach is not established.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect when the number of holdings is three as in the variation effect example 1, the approach display effect is not performed when the decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is temporarily stopped (0 %), but is not limited to this.
For example, in the fluctuating effect when the number of reservations is 3, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability when the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped. However, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is temporarily stopped, the variation effect when the number of holdings is 0 is higher than the variation effect when the number of holdings is 3 and the approach display is higher. Control to perform the performance. In other words, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is temporarily stopped, the variation effect when the number of holdings is 0 is closer to the display effect than the variation effect when the number of holdings is three. Control so that it is easy to do. That is, when the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped, the control is performed so that the closer to the display effect, the easier it is to perform the approach display effect.

[Modification 1]
Next, a modification of the variation effect example (variation effect example 2) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
44 and 45 are diagrams showing a modified example (modified example 1) of the variation effect example of the B mode as the effect mode in the high-probability time short game state of the variation effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 44(1) to 44(3), after the variation of the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness starts, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are aligned. Reach is established. When the reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 (the numeral "4" in the illustrated example) are also temporarily stopped.
Further, when the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 44(4), the numeral enlarged display effect and the separation effect are performed as the reach time schematic effect.

When the separation effect is performed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are reduced and displayed at the separation position as shown in FIG. 44(5). At this time, the numeric elements 411 and the numeric decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are partially displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden after the transition effect shown in FIG. 44(6).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44(7), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed as the SP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(8), the detachment suggestion image 62 is displayed. Further, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, the middle fourth symbol 56 (the numeral "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45(9), a transition effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45(10), the decorative design 41 of the off-set is temporarily stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the reach is established. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 45(11), the light effect of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45(12), the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is definitely stopped. To be done. In addition, with the fixed stop of the decorative design 41 at the outlier, the three fourth symbols 56 that have been temporarily stopped are also fixed.

As described above, also in the B mode, the separation effect may be performed as the reach-time drawing effect. In addition, in the B mode, when the decorative pattern 41 on the left side is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be returned from the separated position to the variation start position without performing the approach display effect.

Further, when the reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped together. Further, the three fourth symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped when the decorative design 41 of the outlying eye is temporarily stopped.
The display mode of the fourth symbol 56 described above is not limited to the high probability time saving game state, and may be performed when the low probability time saving no game state.

[Modification 2]
Next, modified examples of the variation effect example (variation effect example 2) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 and the variation effect example (variation effect example 4) described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43 will be described. ..
46 to FIG. 48 are diagrams showing a variation example (variation example 2) of the variation production example 4 and the variation production example of the A mode as the production mode in the low probability time saving non-gaming state in the variation production example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the description that is the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 46(1) to 46(3), after the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 starts, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 (shown in the figure). In the example, the numbers "7") are aligned to form a reach.
When the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 46(4), the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move in a direction in which they approach each other. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 41 is right next to the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right side, and the right decorative pattern 41 is right next to the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the left side. .. In other words, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other toward the middle decorative design 41. As a result, the distance between the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 becomes shorter than before the reach is established. At this time, the reach notification image 71 is displayed. The reach notification image 71 is an image for notifying which of the decorative patterns 41 is aligned and the reach is established, and in the illustrated example, the reach notification image 71 is an image in which a message “Tempai of 7!” is drawn.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46(5), a separation effect is performed, and as for the left and right decorative designs 41, as shown in FIG. 46(6), the character element 413 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Is displayed.
Then, the medium decoration pattern 41 is variably displayed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). After that, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper side in the display area of the image display unit 114 while reducing, as shown in FIG. 47(8), through the transition effect shown in FIG. 46(7). Specifically, the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness. At this time, the SP reach front stage image 64 is displayed as the SP reach effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(9), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(11), the SPSP reach pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(12), the SPSP reach post-stage image 67 is displayed. At this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. In addition, at this time, the effect button 161 projects in a manner similar to the other effect button images 68.
When the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be out of alignment as shown in FIG. 47(13). A third out-of-focus suggestion image 72 is displayed. The third outlying suggestion image 72 is an image showing that the food that the two characters (inadvertently Sanbei and Yushichi Windmill) ate was not delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(14), a transition effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(15), the decorative design 41 of the off-edge is displayed in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the close-up display effect is not performed, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 are returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(16), the light emission effect of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48(17), the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is definitely stopped.

As described above, in the second modification, when the reach is established, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are moved in the direction of approaching each other. By doing so, it is possible to give a stronger impression to the player as to which of the decorative patterns 41 is aligned and the reach is established.

In Modification 2, the character pattern enlarged display effect is not performed after the reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character symbol enlarged display effect may be performed after the reach is established. In this case, after the character design enlarged display effect is performed, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be moved toward each other. In addition, an operation of moving the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 toward each other may be performed while the character design enlarged display effect is being performed. Further, the character design enlarged display effect may be performed after the operation of moving the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 toward each other is performed.

Further, although it has been described that when the reach is established, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other, but the operation of the left and right decorative designs 41 is not limited to this. For example, when the reach is established, at least one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be operated so as to approach the other.

Further, even in the high-probability time shortening game state, after the reach is established, an operation of moving the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 toward each other may be performed. Further, at this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in an enlarged manner. In this case, an operation of moving the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 toward each other may be performed after the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed. Further, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 may be moved toward each other while the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 3]
Next, modified examples of variation effect example 2 and variation effect example 4 will be described.
FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are diagrams showing a variation example (variation example 3) of the variation production example and the variation production example 4 of the A mode as the production mode in the low probability short time non-gaming state of the variation production example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the description that is the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, the same effect as that described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and 36(A-5) to 36(A-7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(1), the special design 42 as one mode of the middle decorative design 41 is changed at a low speed. This special symbol 42 is a symbol for confirming that the SP reach effect will be developed after the stop symbol is displayed. The special design 42 is changed so that it can be seen on the front side of the left and right decorative designs 41. Further, the special design 42 has a wider display area than the middle decorative design 41 (see FIG. 37(A-9)) which is expanded and changed after the reach is established.
Subsequently, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 49(2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are then hidden as shown in FIG. 49(3).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(4), the transition effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49(5), the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed as the SP reach effect. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness is displayed above the display area of the image display unit 114 with a display size smaller than that of the decorative pattern 41 before the reach is established. Specifically, the left decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(6), the SP reach effect image 61 and the effect button image 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(7).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(8), the SPSP reach front stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(9), the SPSP reach post-stage image 67 is displayed and another effect button image 68 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 projects in a manner similar to the other effect button images 68. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, the third detachment suggestion image 72 is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50(11), a transition effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(12), the decorative design 41 of the off-set is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 has returned to the display size before the character design enlarged display effect is performed. Further, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(13), after the light emission effect of the decorative pattern 41 on the outlier is performed, as shown in FIG. 50(14), the decorative design 41 on the outlier is definitely stopped.

As described above, in this variation effect example, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are hidden. Here, when the special design 42 is stopped and displayed, the SP reach production is subsequently developed, but the displayed left and right decorative designs 41 and the special design 42 are not the same decorative design 41. Therefore, the player may mistakenly recognize that the decorative pattern 41 of the outlier is displayed when looking at the displayed left and right decorative designs 41 and special designs 42. Therefore, when the special design 42 is stopped and displayed, the left and right decorative designs 41 are hidden so as to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the outlying decorative design 41 is displayed.

[Modification 4]
Next, modified examples of variation effect example 2 and variation effect example 4 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a variation example (variation example 4) of the variation production example and the variation production example 4 of the A mode as the production mode in the low-probability time shortening non-gaming state in the variation production example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the description that is the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4), 36(A-5) to 36(A-7), 41(1), 43(3), and 43(A). 8) Through the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIG. 43(11). Then, as shown in FIG. 51(1), the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 has returned to the display size before the character design enlarged display effect is performed. Further, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.

Further, the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, in the variation effect example 4, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier shown in FIGS. 43(12) and 43(13) is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier.

Then, a revival production is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(2), the movable effect 115 moves to the front side of the image display unit 114 to perform an effect effect that covers a part of the image display unit 114, and a revival effect is provided. A revival effect image 73 indicating that the action is being performed is displayed. This revival effect image 73 is an image showing that the food that Sabeye carelessly ate was delicious. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(3), three decorative patterns 41 having high decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in a combination of "444". Specifically, each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is displayed with a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 enlarged and displayed by the character pattern enlarged display effect. At this time, a part of the left decorative design 41 and a part of the right decorative design 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative design 41, and the middle decorative design 41 is more than the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41. The double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a wide display area.
In addition, the revival effect, after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment, the effect of changing to the decorative symbol that informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit Is. In this revival effect, for example, “454” is displayed as a stop symbol after “454” is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(4), the decorative design 41 of the doublet pattern is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the display size in each of the decorative designs 41 of the doublet is returned to the display size before the character design enlarged display effect is performed. Further, at this time, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 perform an operation of moving in a direction in which they approach each other. As a result, the decorative design 41 of the doublet returns to the variation start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 51(5), after the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 of the doublet eyes is performed, the decorative pattern 41 of doublet eyes is definitely stopped as shown in FIG. 51(6). To be done.

As described above, in the modified example 4, after the decorative pattern 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped, the revival effect is performed. Here, when the left and right decorative designs 41 of the out-of-range decorative design 41 are displayed in the separated position, the rehabilitation effect is not performed, and the left and right decorative design 41 of the out-of-range decorative design 41 are at the variation start position. When it is displayed in, the revival effect is performed. In other words, the revival effect is not performed until the left and right decorative patterns 41 of the outlying decorative patterns 41 move to the fluctuation start position, and the revival effect is performed after moving to the fluctuation start position.

Here, if the revival effect is performed when the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed in the separated position, when the decorative design 41 at the outlying position is displayed in the variation start position, the player changes this There is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced because it is determined that the revival effect will not be performed in the effect. Therefore, by performing the revival effect after the left and right decorative designs 41 return from the separated position to the fluctuation start position, after the left and right decorative designs 41 of the out-of-range decorative designs 41 move to the fluctuation start position. Even so, the player is expected to expect a revival effect.

In the modified example 4, when the light-emitting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is performed, the revival effect is not performed thereafter. On the other hand, when the revival effect is performed, the three luminescent designs 41 are subsequently illuminated.
Further, in the modified example 4, the decorative design 41 of the doublet is returned to the variation start position, but the decorative design 41 of the doublet is displayed in a position different from the variation start position, and the light-emission effect and confirmation are performed. The stop may be performed.

[Modification 5]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 5) of the character pattern enlarged display effect.
In the above description, as the character design enlarged display effect, it has been described that the character elements 413 in the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed after the reach is established, and the number elements 411 and the number decoration elements 412 are not enlarged and displayed. Here, the aspect of the enlarged display of the decorative symbol 41 by the character symbol enlarged display effect is not limited to the above example.

For example, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 52(1), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(2), the numeral elements 411, the numeral decoration elements 412, and the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are formed. May be displayed enlarged. In other words, the display areas of the number elements 411, the number decoration elements 412, and the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be wide.
After the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 52(3), the numeral elements 411 and the numeral decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed, and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed. Good. In other words, the display areas of the number elements 411 and the number decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be widened and the display area of the character element 413 may not be widened.
Further, when the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed in a reduced size, the enlarged part of the decorative design 41 may be displayed in a reduced size. Further, the left and right decorative designs 41 do not have to be reduced and displayed during the reach effect after being enlarged and displayed.
Further, the left and right decorative designs 41 may be enlarged and displayed, so that the distance between the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be shorter than that before the reach is established.

In the above description, an example in which the decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness is used in the low probability short game state and the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness is used in the high probability short game state has been described. , But is not limited to this. For example, in the low-probability time saving non-gaming state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness may be used. Further, in the high-probability time short game state, the decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness may be used. Further, when the character design enlarged display effect is performed on the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness used in the high-probability time shortened game state, any aspect of the character symbol enlarged display effect described above may be performed.
Further, when the reach is established, the character element 413 may be more easily enlarged and displayed after the reach is established in the low-probability time saving game state than in the high-probability time saving game state. Here, when the reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low probability short time non-gaming state than in the high probability short time gaming state. It is also included that the character element 413 is always enlarged after the establishment of (1) (100%), and that the character element 413 is not enlarged after the establishment of the reach (0%) in the high probability time saving game state. Further, in the case where the reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time-short game state than in the high-probability time-short game state. It is also included that the character element 413 is enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability after the establishment, and in the high-probability time saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed (0%). When enlarging and displaying the character element 413, the numeral decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged.

Further, when the reach is established, it is possible to make it easier to enlarge and display both the numerical element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time saving game state than in the high-probability time saving game state. Here, in the case where the reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time saving non-gaming state than in the high-probability time saving gaming state. In the non-gaming state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are always enlarged and displayed after the reach is established (100%), and in the high probability short game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged after the reach is established. It also includes not displaying (0%). In addition, in the case where the reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time saving non-gaming state than in the high-probability time saving gaming state, because the low-probability time saving In the gaming state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability after the reach is established, and in the high-probability time shortening gaming state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used and the number element 411 and the character element 413 are used. It is also included that both are not enlarged (0%). It should be noted that when both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged and displayed, the number decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged.

Further, in the above description, when the reach is established, the high probability short game state is easier to perform the number enlarged display effect after the reach is established than the low probability short game state, but it is not limited to this. ..
For example, when the reach is established, the low probability short time non-gaming state may be easier to perform the number enlarged display effect after the reach is established than the high probability short time gaming state. Here, when the reach is established, the low probability short time non-gaming state is easier to perform the number enlarged display effect after the reach is established than the high probability short time gaming state is that the reach is established in the low probability short time no gaming state. It also includes that the number enlarged display effect is always performed later (100%), and the number enlarged display effect is not performed (0%) after the reach is established in the high probability time saving game state.

Further, the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 may be regarded as a specific identification element. Furthermore, the number element 411 and the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 may be regarded as a specific identification element.

[Modification 6]
53 and 54 are diagrams showing a modified example (modified example 6) of the reach-time packaging effect.
In the above description, in the low probability time saving non-gaming state, after the reach is established, the separation effect is performed while the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed, and then the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed. .. Here, the timing of the character design enlarged display effect, the timing of the separation effect, and the timing at which the left and right decorative designs 41 are reduced and displayed are not limited to the above example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53(1), reach is established, then, as shown in FIG. 53(2), character design enlarged display effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Direction may be performed. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 53(4), the left and right decorative designs 41 may be reduced and displayed.
Further, for example, after the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 53(5), the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed. May be. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 53(7), a separation effect may be performed.

Further, for example, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 54(8), then the character design enlarged display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 54(9), and then, as shown in FIG. 54(10). In addition, the separation effect may be performed while the left and right decorative designs 41 are reduced and displayed.
Further, with respect to the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an enlarged size, the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is moved, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed after the reach is established in the high-probability time shortened gaming state, any aspect of the modified example 6 may be performed.

[Modification 7]
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 7) of a mode in which the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 and displayed.
In the above description, in the low probability short time non-gaming state, since the separation effect is performed after the reach is established, a part of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative designs 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 and displayed. Explained that it will be done. Here, the aspect in which the left and right decorative designs 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 and displayed is not limited to the above example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55(1), a part of the numeral decoration element 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the character element 413 and the numeral element 411 are displayed in the image display unit. It may be displayed in a mode that cannot be overlooked from the display area 114.
Also, as shown in FIG. 55(2), in the left and right decorative patterns 41, a part of the numeral element 411, a part of the numeral decorative element 412, and a part of the character element 413 are displayed on the image display unit 114. It may be displayed in such a manner as to be cut off from the area.

As shown in FIG. 55(3), a part of the numeral elements 411 and a part of the numeral decorative elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the character element 413 becomes It may be displayed in a manner that it cannot be overlooked from the display area of the image display unit 114.
Also, as shown in FIG. 54(4), of the left and right decorative patterns 41, part of the numeral decoration elements 412 and part of the character elements 413 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the numeral elements 411 become It may be displayed in a form that cannot be seen from the display area.

Further, depending on the decorative pattern 41, the elements that can be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114 among the number elements 411, the number decoration elements 412, and the character elements 413 may be different.
Further, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be different from each other among the numerical elements 411, the numerical decoration elements 412, and the character elements 413 that can be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be different in the size of the area cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114.

Even when the numerical element 411 of the decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, half or more of the area occupied by the numerical element 411 is within the display area of the image display unit 114. Is displayed. Therefore, even when the numerical element 411 of the decorative symbol 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, the player can recognize which symbols are aligned and the reach is established. However, more than half of the area occupied by the number elements 411 may be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114.

[Modification 8]
Next, a modified example (modified example 8) of the display mode of the fourth symbol 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 8) of the display mode of the fourth symbol 56. In the following description, the points that are different from the first modification will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the first modification may be omitted.

First, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 44(1) to 44(7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(1), from the state in which the left and right fourth symbols 56 (both “4” in the illustrated example) are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 56(2), The fourth symbol 56 moves at high speed, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize which of the fourth symbols 56 is displayed.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(3), the fourth symbol 56 returns to the original display area again and is temporarily stopped. At this time, as the left and right fourth symbols 56, the fourth symbol 56 of "3" is temporarily stopped.

As described above, in this modified example, after the reach is established, the change effect in which the left and right symbols that are aligned in the temporarily stopped state are changed is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the symbol of "3" after the change is higher than the symbol of "4" before the change, in the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the high probability time saving after the end of the big hit game. There is a high probability that the game will be played.
Therefore, by changing the left and right fourth symbols 56, the player is further expected to be in a high-probability-time short game state after the jackpot game when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Can be made.

The change effect of the fourth symbol described above is not limited to the high probability time saving game state, and may be performed when the low probability time saving no game state.
Further, a change effect of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed. For example, a change effect of the left and right decorative designs 41 with low decorativeness shown in FIG. 38(A-3) may be performed.

[Modification 9]
Next, a modified example of the variation effect example 2 described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a modification example (modification example 9) of the variation effect example of the A mode as the effect mode in the low probability time saving non-gaming state in the variation effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.

First, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 57(1), when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the separated position, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off, and then the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored to the power source and the game is played. When a command related to power-on is transmitted from the control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 displays the power-restoring image 75 on the image display unit 114, as shown in FIG. 57(2). More specifically, the image/acoustic control unit 310 that has received the power-on command from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the power-restoring image 75.

Then, the effect control unit 300 transmits a power restoration completion command which is a command indicating that the restoration of the power is finished after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the image 75 during restoration of the power is displayed. In the image/sound control unit 310 that has received the power restoration end command, the image/sound control unit 310 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like (see FIG. 57(3)). The decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 displayed at this time are initial symbols (default symbols) that are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed in a combination of "1 23".

The decorative symbol 41 displayed as a combination of "1233" as the default symbol is set regardless of the result of the last symbol variation or the symbol variation being executed. In addition, the background image displayed on the background of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the combination of "1 2 3" is also defined independently of the background image displayed at the time of executing the previous pattern change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57(3), when the special symbol is changing when the decorative symbol 41 or the like is displayed, that is, when the decorative symbol 41 is being changed and displayed, until the special symbol variation ends. , The display of the decorative design 41 of the default design "1 2 3" is maintained until the variation of the special design is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 does not perform the approach display effect. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 before the character design enlarged display effect. At this time, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display unit 114 have returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are returned to the variation start position without the approach display effect being performed.

Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is notified out by continuing to display the decorative symbol 41 of the default symbol "1233". .. Further, when the image/sound control unit 310 receives a customer waiting command from the effect control unit 300 after the special symbols have stopped changing, the image/sound control unit 310 executes the customer waiting effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the decorative symbol 41 is a lottery result of the jackpot special symbol lottery from the default symbol "1233". Is switched to a combination (for example, "111") of a big hit. This informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Even in this case, the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 after switching is returned to the display size of the left and right decorative designs 41 before the character design enlarged display effect. Further, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display unit 114 after the switching have returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 after switching are returned to the variation start position without the approach display effect being performed.

As described above, in this modified example, after the reach-time drawing effect is performed, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off, and when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the approach display effect is performed. Without that, the left and right decorative designs 41 return to the variation start position.
In the above description, the case where the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and the power is restored before the SP reach effect is performed after the reach is established has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the power is cut off and the power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the reach is established and the SP reach effect is started, the same as described with reference to FIGS. 57(2) and 57(3). Image display may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the character element 413 of the decorative design 41 operates when the decorative design 41 with high decorativeness is temporarily stopped has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the variation of the decorative pattern 41 is started, the character elements 413 of the three decorative patterns 41 may each perform an operation according to the decorative pattern 41. Further, when the reach is established, the character element 413 of the left decorative design 41 and the character element 413 of the right decorative design 41 may be operated. In addition, after performing the enlarged display and the reduced display of the decorative design 41 of the doublet pattern described with reference to FIG. 40(A-9) and FIG. 40(A-10), the light emission effect (FIG. )) is performed, the character element 413 of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 may be operated.
In addition, the operation performed when the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 starts changing, the operation performed when the character element 413 is temporarily stopped, the operation performed when the reach is established, and the operation performed by the character element 413 of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 are The operations may be different from each other or may be the same.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the approach display effect, it is described that the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may perform an operation of moving toward the other, and the other may not perform the operation of moving toward the other. May be regarded as the approach display effect. Further, one of the left decorative design 41 and the middle decorative design 41 may perform an operation of moving in a direction approaching the other, and this operation may be grasped as an approach display effect. Further, either one of the right decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 may be moved in a direction of approaching the other, and this operation may be grasped as an approach display effect. That is, at least one of the one of the three decorative symbols 41 and the other symbol may be operated so as to approach the other.
Further, in order that one of the three decorative patterns 41 approaches the other decorative pattern 41, at least one of the one decorative pattern 41 and the other decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. The distance between the one decorative design 41 and the other decorative design 41 is also shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is described that the character effect is performed when the revival effect is performed, but the condition for performing the character effect is not limited to the case where the revival effect is performed.
For example, the character effect may be performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, or the character effect may be performed when the jackpot suggestion image 69 or the second jackpot suggestion image 70 is displayed. .. In this case, a character effect that is performed when the revival effect is performed, a character effect that is performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, and the jackpot suggestion image 69 and the second jackpot suggestion image 70 are displayed. The character effect performed when the moving effect is performed may be an effect in which the operation modes of the movable accessory 115 are the same or may be effects in which the operation modes are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the SP reach effect is performed in the low probability short time non-gaming state or after the SP reach effect, and when the SP reach effect is performed in the high probability short time gaming state or after the SP reach effect, respectively. Although it has been described that the performance is performed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the jackpot suggestion image 69 and the second jackpot suggestion image 70 are displayed, the transition effect may be performed immediately before or after the double-decoration decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
Further, each transition effect may be the same effect mode or may be a different effect mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the special symbol 42 is displayed after the reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the special design 42 may be stopped and displayed after the right decorative design 41 different from the left decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, for example, when one of the three decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped and the other two decorative patterns 41 are changing, the special pattern 42 may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the A mode as the effect mode in the low probability short time non-gaming state and the B mode as the effect mode in the high probability short time gaming state are provided, but it is not limited to this. Not done. For example, as the effect mode in the low probability time saving non-gaming state, A mode and B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 at the start of variation of the decorative symbol 41 (before the reach is established). Further, for example, as the effect mode in the high-probability time shortening game state, an A mode and a B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 at the start of variation of the decorative symbol 41 (before the reach is established).

[Second Embodiment]
[Direction image]
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the second embodiment, the effect control unit 300 controls the effect image to be displayed on the image display unit 114. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56. Further, in the image display unit 114, the transition image 60, the effect button image 63, the right hitting image 87, the SP image 91, the SPSP image 93, the introduction image 94, the effect name notification image 95, the round number display image 96, the ending image 97. The end suggestion image 98, the probability variation mode end image 99, and the power recovery in progress image 89 may be displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, a four-division effect is executed. The effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 by the four-division effect includes the decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestive image 85.
Below, each above-mentioned production image is explained. It should be noted that here, the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment will be described, but the description of some effect images of the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment may be omitted. ..

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are individually described, the symbol arranged on the left side is "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is "middle decorative symbol 41", the right side The pattern arranged in may be referred to as a "right decorative pattern 41". In addition, when the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative design 41".

The decorative pattern 41 of the present embodiment is composed of a combination of a plurality of image elements. In the present embodiment, as the image elements that can form the decorative pattern 41, a number element 411 that indicates a number, a number decoration element 412 that decorates the number element 411, and a character element 413 that indicates a character are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, as a part of the character element 413, an effect image (so-called aura) is displayed around the character.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, there are a mode with high decorativeness and a mode with low decorativeness. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(1), in a display mode with high decorativeness, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(1), in a mode with low decorativeness, the character element 413 is not displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the numeral elements 411 and 412. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change of the game state or the progress of the effect. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 in the display mode with low decorativeness is displayed in the effect executed in the high-probability time shortened gaming state, the SP effect, and the 4-divisional effect (described later), and the display mode with high decorativeness. The decorative pattern 41 of is displayed in other cases.

In the variable effect of the decorative design 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative designs 41 by, for example, a vertical scroll, and then temporarily stops the left decorative design 41 (for example, the Chinese numeral “two”). Then, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, Chinese numeral "three") is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numeral "1") is temporarily stopped. In this way, after the state in which all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, all the decorative symbols 41 are finally fixed and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbols. The combination “2, 13” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 58(1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 in which three pieces are not arranged in this way may be referred to as a decorative pattern 41 at the edge.

It should be noted that here, switching of two display modes, that is, a mode in which the decorative pattern 41 has high decorativeness and a mode in which the decorative pattern 41 has low decorativeness, is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be switched in three or more modes. To further explain, the display mode may be switched according to the size of the decorative pattern 41, for example. Specifically, the decoration element 41 may not be displayed as the decorative pattern 41, and a plurality of aspects with low decorativeness may be provided. Then, when the size of each decorative pattern is relatively small as in the case of 4-divisional effect (described later), a display mode with lower decorativeness is adopted, and the size of the decorative pattern is relatively large like in the high-probability time short game state. When it is large, a display mode with higher decorativeness may be adopted.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), on the image display unit 114, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like) is changing the special symbol (the decorative symbol 41 is being variably displayed). The fluctuation image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image relating to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variation image 51 is displayed in the area where the variation image 51 is displayed when the variation display of the special symbol is started (the lower center portion in the display area of the image display unit 114 in the illustrated example), and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears with the stop display. In addition, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing. In addition, the variation image 51 is based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing, and the display mode of, for example, a color, a pattern, a shape, or the like (hereinafter, referred to as “color or the like”) is changed, so that the expectation degree of the jackpot is won. To inform or suggest. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the color of the variable image 51, the degree of expectation may be set higher in the later order in this order.

[Holding image 52]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), the reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the reserved ball of this time in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the hold image 52 is an image showing that the right of the jackpot determination is held. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing.
In addition, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variation pedestal of the variation image 51 and the retention pedestal of the retention image 52 are displayed in different modes.

Further, the hold image 52 informs or suggests the expectation level of the jackpot, for example, by changing the display mode such as the color based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Furthermore, when the pre-judgment result of the pre-judgment processing is a big hit, the kind of color or the like having a higher degree of expectation is set to be displayed than in the case of a big hit. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expected degree may be set higher in the later order in this order.

Here, as described above, a maximum of four reservations are generated due to the winning in the first starting opening 121. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning in the first starting opening 121. In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed in an area on the right side of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position away from the variable image 51, that is, from the left side to the right side. It

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four withdrawals also occur due to winning at the second starting opening 122. Therefore, due to winning in the second starting opening 122, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form.

Further, in the following description, regarding the maximum four retained images 52 displayed, the “first retained image 52 ”, the “second retained image 52 ”, and the “third retained image 52 ”are respectively arranged in order from the variable image 51. These may be referred to as "held image 52" and "fourth held image 52".

[Holding number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), the image display unit 114 displays the number-of-holdings display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the holding balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the held images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of held winnings to the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122, respectively.

[Fourth design 56]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 etc.). A fourth design 56 is displayed, which indicates that the design is changing (decorative display of the decorative design 41 is changing). The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300, and is displayed in a different mode depending on the change and stop of the special symbol.
Note that, for each of the three symbols constituting the fourth symbol 56, when individually explained, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left fourth symbol 56", and the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle fourth symbol 56". The symbol arranged on the right side may be referred to as "right fourth symbol 56". Further, when the left fourth symbol 56 and the right fourth symbol 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right fourth symbols 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth symbols 56 are three images corresponding to the decorative symbols 41, respectively, and are displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The fourth design 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller size than the decorative design 41. As described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative mode, but the fourth pattern 56 is a low decorative mode. Only displayed in.

The fourth symbol 56 is displayed (for example, vertical scrolling) in a mode that indicates that the special symbol is changing with the winning in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122. Then, the fourth symbol 56 is stopped together with the stop display of the special symbol. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the fourth symbol 56 that is stopped and displayed matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. To further explain, in the example of FIG. 58(1), as the fourth symbol 56, a number corresponding to "two one three" of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed.

[Transition image 60]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(10), the transition image 60 indicating (notifying) that the SP reach effect is executed is displayed on the image display unit 114. Here, although a predetermined image is displayed as the transition image 60, it may be a single color image displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. For example, a so-called whiteout may be executed by displaying a white image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114. Also, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114. The decorative pattern 41 may be hidden along with the display of the transition image 60. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the SP reach executed after the transition.

[Button operation image 63]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(9), the image display unit 114 displays a button operation image 63 that is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161 (see FIG. 2B). .. By displaying the button operation image 63, it is possible to recognize that it is time for the player to operate the effect button 161.

[Right-handed image 87]
As shown in FIG. 64(1), a right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 87 is an image for notifying the player that the player is in a state advantageous to the player by right-handing (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

[SP image 91]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(11), the image display unit 114 displays an SP image 91 which is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP image 91 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

[SPSP image 93]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the SPSP image 93 which is an image showing that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP image 93 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fights an enemy character.

[Introduction image 94]
As shown in FIG. 67(3), the image display unit 114 displays an introductory image 94 that is an image for inspiring whether or not a four-division effect (described later) is executed. In other words, the introduction image 94 is an image that suggests that the 4-division effect is executed before the 4-division effect is started. The introductory image 94 in the illustrated example is a cross-shaped figure that increases in size over time, and is an image that becomes a part of the decorative frame 81 described later. In addition, the introductory image 94 has a shape reminiscent of the decorative frame 81. Note that the four-division effect may not be executed after the introduction image 94 is displayed. That is, the introductory image 94 may be executed as a so-called gaze.

[Production name notification image 95]
As shown in FIG. 68-1 (2), the image display unit 114 displays an effect name notification image 95 that is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. This effect name notification image 95 is displayed when the jackpot game is started, and notifies the type of jackpot game.

[Round image 96]
As shown in FIG. 68-1(3), the image display unit 114 displays a round image 96 which is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed in the jackpot game. ..

[Ending image 97]
As shown in FIG. 68-1(5), the image display unit 114 displays an ending image 97 which is an image for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot game. This ending image 97 is displayed when the jackpot game is over, and suggests (notifies) to the player that the jackpot game is over. The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the effect mode set after the big hit, and the character string of "probability variation mode entry!!" which suggests (notifies) that the effect mode is set. This ending image 97 suggests (notifies) that the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability time shortening gaming state. Further, the ending image 97 disappears when the ending time ends.

[End suggestion image 98]
As shown in FIG. 68-2(9), the image display unit 114 displays an end suggestion image 98 that is an image that informs the player that the timing at which the high-probability time saving game state is about to end is approaching. .. This end suggestion image 98 is displayed together with the start of the variable display of the special symbol immediately before the high probability time saving game state ends. The ending suggestion image 98 in the illustrated example includes a character string of "Last!!" which indicates that the high probability time saving game state ends with the stop display of the changing special symbol. This end suggestion image 98 becomes non-display as the special symbol immediately before the high probability short game state ends is stopped and displayed.

[Probability change mode end image 99]
As shown in FIG. 68-2(11), the image display unit 114 displays a probability variation mode end image 99 which is an image for informing the player that the high-probability time saving game state has ended. This probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed when the high-probability time shortening game state ends, that is, together with the last stop of fluctuation of the special symbol. The probability variation mode end image 99 in the illustrated example is an image that prompts the player to change the hitting force of the game ball and leftward when the state that is advantageous to the player is ended by hitting it right. The probability variation mode end image 99 suggests (notifies) that the gaming state in the next variation is a low probability time saving no gaming state. Further, the probability variation mode end image 99 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the high-probability time saving game state.

[Image 89 during power restoration]
As shown in FIG. 69 (3), which will be described later, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, a power recovery image 89 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The power recovery image 89 is an image showing that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the recovery process. The power-restoring image 89 is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 was turned on.

[Example of production using decorative pattern 41]
In the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the decorative pattern 41 performed on the image display unit 114. For example, examples of effects using the decorative design 41 include reach-inspiring effects, reach-time drawing effects, stop-time drawing effects, and four-division effects. Hereinafter, each effect will be described.

[Reach fuel production]
The reach agitation effect is an effect that agitates whether or not the reach effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 58(4). More specifically, in the reach-inspiring effect, after the left decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped, the scrolling right decorative design 41 is decelerated, and the design matching the design displayed as the left decorative design 41 is stopped. The production that stirs up is performed. It should be noted that while the reach agitation effect is executed in the decorative symbol 41, the reach agitation effect is not executed in the fourth symbol 56.

[Reach time plan production]
As shown in FIG. 59-1(6), the reach time schematic drawing effect is an effect executed by the decorative design 41 when the reach effect is executed. More specifically, in the reach-time design effect, an effect using the decorative pattern 41 is executed, such as a character of the decorative pattern 41 moving when the reach effect is executed. The reach-time schematic drawing effect includes, for example, a change in the position of the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, a change in the size of the decorative pattern 41, and the like. Specifically, there is an operation in which the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 approach each other, and an operation in which the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 become large. Further, as the reach-time design effect, the effect that the color and shape of the effect image is changed in the character element 413 of each decorative pattern 41 is executed, and the color and shape of the number decorative element 412 of each decorative pattern 41 is changed. Includes performing an effect. In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are separated from each other. It should be noted that while the reach designing effect is executed in the decorative design 41, the reach designing effect is not executed in the fourth design 56.

[Demonstration at stop]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(13), the stationary design effect is an effect executed by the temporarily stopped decorative design 41. More specifically, in the stop-time drawing effect, an effect in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes, such as the character of the decorative pattern 41 moving when temporarily stopped, is executed. The stop-time drawing effect includes, for example, a change in the position of the area in which the decorative design 41 is displayed, a change in the size of the decorative design 41, and the like. Further, as the stationary drawing effect, the effect that the color and shape of the effect image is changed in the character element 413 of each decorative pattern 41 is executed, and the color and shape of the number decorative element 412 of each decorative pattern 41 is changed. It includes performing the effect.

[4 division production]
In the present embodiment, a four-division effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(1), in the four-division effect, a predetermined area in the image display unit 114 (for example, the central portion of the image display unit 114) is divided into a plurality of areas. Then, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in each of the divided areas. At this time, in each area, three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are displayed. Assuming that the three decorative patterns 41 displayed in each area are one set of decorative patterns 41, in the four-division effect, a plurality of sets (for example, four sets) of the decorative patterns 41 are used for variable display of the decorative patterns 41. Is done.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(1), while one set of decorative symbols 41 is displayed in the state where the four-division effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 61(1). In the state where the 4-division effect is being executed, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41 are displayed. By executing such a 4-divisional effect, the player can be surprised. Further, the variable display is executed for each of the plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41, so that it is possible to make the player feel that the chances of aligning the symbols are increased, and to provide the player with a so-called profitable feeling.

Here, the timing when the four-division effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, the four-division effect is executed according to the progress of the effect or the change in the game state. For example, the four-division effect is executed according to the result of the lottery using the effect random number which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25(a). Further, the four-division effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing. Further, the four-division effect may be executed when the gaming state is switched from the high-probability time-shortened gaming state (so-called right-handed state) to the low-probability time-shortened non-gaming state. Specifically, when the gaming state is switched from the high-probability time-shortened gaming state to the low-probability time-shortened non-gaming state, the four-division effect may be executed without fail. Here, the execution ratio in which the 4-divisional effect is executed is higher in the low-probability-time short non-gaming state than in the high-probability time-short gaming state, that is, the right hit state. The four-division effect may be controlled not to be executed in the so-called right-handed state.

Now, in the four-division effect, the decoration frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 are displayed. Hereinafter, each of the decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestive image 85 will be described in order.

[Decorative frame 81]
As shown in FIG. 61(1), when the four-division effect is executed, the decoration frame 81 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This decorative frame 81 can be grasped as an image notifying that the four-division effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 divides the central portion of the image display unit 114, that is, the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, into four. Here, of the regions divided by the decorative frame 81, the upper left frame is the first frame 81A, the upper right frame is the second frame 81B, the lower left frame is the third frame 81C, and the lower right frame is the fourth frame 81D. To do. Further, in the following description, the decorative pattern 41 displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is the first set decorative pattern 41A, the second set decorative pattern 41B, the third set decorative pattern 41C, and It may be referred to as the fourth decorative pattern 41D.

Here, in the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 has four frames, that is, the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed is divided into four by the decorative frame 81, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed may be divided into two or three, or may be divided into five or more. To explain further, here, it is described that the effect is performed by using four sets of decorative symbols 41 as the four-division effect, but two, three, or five or more decorative symbols 41 may be used.

Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 includes orthogonal lines, but the aspect of the decorative frame 81 is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to divide the region displaying the set of each decorative pattern 41. For example, it may be possible to adopt a mode in which the regions displaying the sets of the decorative patterns 41 are color-coded. Further, a mode may be used in which a plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41 are displayed at different positions in the image display unit 114 without dividing the region by the decorative frame 81 or the like.

Here, the color of the decorative frame 81 is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the decorative frame 81, the expectations may be set higher in the later order.

Further, as described above, the variable display is executed for each of the four decorative patterns 41. Then, the reach effect may be executed with the decorative design 41 of each set. Here, the number of groups for which the reach effect is executed among the four groups of decorative symbols 41 is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, the expectation may be set to increase as the number of sets in which the reach effect is executed increases. Specifically, when the reach effect is executed with all of the four sets of decorative symbols 41, the degree of expectation is higher than when the reach effect is executed with one set of the decorative symbols 41.

In addition, the 4-divisional effect is an effect that is started before the reach effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41. In other words, the decorative frame 81 is an image displayed before the reach effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41. Unlike this example, the start timing of the 4-division effect and the display start timing of the decorative frame 81 may be after the reach effect is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the timing at which the decorative symbols 41 of each group temporarily stop or the timing of fixed stop in the four-division effect may be different for each group, or may be simultaneous for all groups. Good.

[Reach line image 83]
As shown in FIG. 62-1(4), the reach line image 83 is an image that suggests that the reach effect has been executed. To further explain, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example suggests a set of the decorative pattern 41 that has become the reach among the plural sets of decorative patterns 41 displayed when executing the four-division effect.

Here, in the same game state (for example, a low probability short time non-gaming state), the decorative pattern 41 displayed when the 4-division effect is executed is displayed when the 4-division effect is not executed. The dimension of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative pattern 41. Therefore, even if the reach effect is executed with the small decorative pattern 41, it may be assumed that the player will be overlooked. Therefore, the reach line image 83 is displayed in order to distinguish the set of decorative patterns 41 which has become a reach from the set of decorative patterns 41 which has not become a reach.

In addition, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example is a set of the decorative designs 41 for which the reach effect is executed, that is, a straight line image that crosses the three decorative designs 41. In other words, the reach line image 83 is an image additionally displayed on the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the reach line image 83 is different from the reach-time design effect in which an effect is executed by deforming the decorative pattern 41 itself in that an image is additionally displayed on the decorative pattern 41.

The reach line image 83 in the illustrated example is an image displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. Here, although the reach line image 83 is described as an image displayed when the four-division effect is executed, it may be displayed when the four-division effect is not executed.

[Development frame image 85]
As shown in FIG. 62-1(5), the development frame suggestion image 85 displays which frame among the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D when the four-division effect is executed is selected. It is an image. In the illustrated example, one of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is selected, and the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in the selected frame. The development frame suggestive image 85 is an image that distinguishes the selected frame, that is, the decorative pattern 41 of the selected group from the decorative pattern 41 of the group that is not selected. In the example shown in the figure, using the selected frame in the 4-split screen, that is, the decorative pattern 41 in which the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed, the subsequent effect (SP reach effect in the example shown) is executed. To be done.

[Variation example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is a variation effect example of the decorative symbol 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. Further, variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment.

As shown in FIG. 58(1), the effect control unit 300 has fixedly stopped the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness in the image display unit 114, along with the end of the variation of the previous special symbol. And Further, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Thus, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Moreover, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the number-of-holdings display 55 of the first starting opening 121 is switched from "1" to "0". In the drawings, when it is shown that the decorative pattern 41 is being variably displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow for easy understanding. Also, the variable display is started in the fourth symbol 56.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(3), the left decorative design 41 is temporarily scrolled at a position which has been definitely stopped until the start of fluctuation, after scrolling at a low speed. At this time, the character element 413 of the left decorative design 41 executes the operation. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 (the number "four") raises its right hand when temporarily stopped. In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, in order to make it easy to understand, a display similar to the double quotation mark is used in the vicinity of the decorative pattern 41.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (4 ), the reach twisting effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative design 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same design (the number "four") as the left decorative design 41, and fuels whether to temporarily stop with the same design as the left decorative design 41. To execute.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolling at a low speed is provisionally stopped at the position which was definitely stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped at the design of the numeral "five" which is a design that does not match the left decorative design 41. That is, the reach eye is not established. In addition, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 executes the operation when it is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(6), the middle decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed, and temporarily stops at the position which has been definitely stopped until the start of fluctuation. The character element 413 of the middle decoration pattern 41 executes the operation when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the middle decorative pattern 41 raises its right hand when it is temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(7), after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the three decorative symbols 41 are definitely stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the combination “425” of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in a stopped state shown in FIG. 58(7) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. Also, with the variation stop of the special symbol, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped. At this time, the combination of the fourth symbols 56 is “425”, which matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

[Variation example 2]
59-1 and 59-2 are diagrams showing an aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59-1 to 59-2. The variation effect example 2 is an example of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. Further, variation effect example 2 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 59-1(1) to 59-1(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 starts from the state in which the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114 is definitely stopped. Then, the reach fueling effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolling at a low speed is temporarily stopped. At this time, the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped at the design of the numeral "four" which is a design that matches the left decorative design 41. That is, the reach effect is executed. In addition, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and executes an operation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(6), the reach-time mounting figure effect is executed. Specifically, the left and right decorative designs 41 are separated from each other (see the white arrow in the figure). Further, in the illustrated example, the character elements 413 in the left and right decorative designs 41 with high decorativeness are enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the numerical elements 411 and the numerical decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative designs 41 are not enlarged and displayed even if the reach is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(7), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a state of being separated from each other. Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 continue the temporary stop at the positions moved to the left and right sides of the image display unit 114, respectively. At this time, the display size of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative designs 41 returns to the display size before the reach is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(8), the middle decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and temporarily stops at the position that has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed to the front side of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In addition, the middle decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped with a design of “5”, which is a number different from the left and right decorative designs 41. That is, an effect as if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(9), the effect button image 63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the temporarily-decorated middle decorative pattern 41. In this way, by displaying the effect button image 63, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player who has once recognized that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery should be expected.
Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(10), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden along with the transition image 60 being displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(11), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 move to the corners (the upper left corner and the upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. The left and right decorative patterns 41 have a small display mode and a low decorative property. More specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed by the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412, respectively. Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. This ensures a large area for displaying the SP image 91. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(12), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(13), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing the stationary drawing effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "445". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in a combination of "445", it is suggested (notified) to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(14), with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Further, "45" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the reduced symbol 57 is in a state of being matched with the combination of "454". When the special design is stopped and displayed, the decorative design 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner. That is, as shown in FIG. 59-1(1), the decorative design 41 is displayed in a manner that coincides with the start of variation of the decorative design 41. This makes it possible to smoothly restart the variation of the decorative pattern 41.

[Variation effect example 3]
60-1 and 60-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60-1 to 60-2. Variation effect example 3 is a variation effect example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. Further, variation effect example 3 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It should be noted that this variation production example 3 is an example of production corresponding to the variation production example 2 described above, and in the following description, differences from the variation production example 2 will be mainly described, and points that coincide with the variation production example 2 will be described. May be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 60-1(1) to 60-1(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 starts from the state where the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is definitely stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the reach fueling effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 60-1(5) to 60-2(12), the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are executed in the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2(13), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing the stationary drawing effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "4,4,4". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in a combination of "4,4,4", it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2(14), with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Further, "44" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 is in a state of being matched with the combination of “4,4,4”. When the special design is stopped and displayed, the decorative design 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner.

[Variation example 4]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation effect (variation effect example 4) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 4 is a variation effect example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. Further, variation effect example 4 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. Furthermore, variation production example 4 is an example of variation production in the case where the four-division production is executed and the reach production is not executed. It should be noted that the timing when the four-division effect is started will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 61(1), the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative frame 81, and the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D each have the first set of decorative patterns 41A to 41A. The fourth decorative pattern 41D is displayed. At this time, each of the 1st set decorative design 41A thru|or the 4th set decorative design 41D is displayed in the aspect with low decorativeness. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412. Here, the 1st set decorative design 41A thru|or the 4th set decorative design 41D are each displayed by the combination of "1556", "212", "213", and "646". That is, the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are displayed in a combination of different designs. In addition, “2, 13” is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the fourth symbol 56 and the third set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of being matched with the combination of "213". In addition, the fourth design 56 is displayed as a design that matches a predetermined one set of the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the 1st set decorative design 41A to the 4th set decorative design 41D start changing all at once. More specifically, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the decorative symbol 41 is in a state of being variably displayed (scrolled) at high speed. Also, the variable display is started in the fourth symbol 56.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61C, the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. That is, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the respective symbols constituting the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are displayed in a pseudo stop state in which they slightly sway. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(4), the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special design. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D simultaneously execute fixed stop. In addition, “2, 13” is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the fourth symbol 56 and the third set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of being matched with the combination of "213". In addition, the fourth design 56 is displayed as a design that matches a predetermined one set of the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D.

In the variation effect example 4 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment, the four-divisional effect is being executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61(1), the decorative design 41 is displayed in a mode that coincides with the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, that is, the variation start of the decorative design 41. As a result, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 41 can be restarted smoothly.
In the illustrated example, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D each start changing, have a temporary stop, and have a fixed stop. Thereby, the control of the decorative pattern 41 by the effect control unit 300 is simplified.

[Variation effect example 5]
62-1 and 62-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 62-1 and FIG. 62-2, the variation effect (variation effect example 5) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Variation production example 5 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 5 is a variation production example when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. Furthermore, the variation effect example 4 is an example of the variation effect when the four-division effect and the reach effect are executed. This fluctuating effect example 5 is an effect example corresponding to the fluctuating effect example 4, and in the following description, differences from the fluctuating effect example 4 will be mainly described, and points that coincide with the fluctuating effect example 4 will be described. May be omitted. In addition, in the fluctuating effect example 5, a part of the effect that corresponds to the fluctuating effect example 2 is executed. Therefore, in the following description, description of the points that coincide with the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 62-1(1) and 62-1(2), the decorative frame 81 and the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are displayed in the image display unit 114, and each of them is displayed. The fluctuation starts from the state in which it is definitely stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(3), the left and right decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped in each of the first to fourth set decorative designs 41A to 41D. Here, among the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, the reach eyes are established in the third set decorative design 41C and the fourth set decorative design 41D. In addition, the medium decorative pattern 41 of the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D continues to be variably displayed at high speed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(4), among the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, the reach in the third set decorative design 41C and the fourth set decorative design 41D in which the reach is established. The line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 of the third set decorative pattern 41C and the fourth set decorative pattern 41D continues to be variably displayed at high speed. Further, among the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, the reach line image 83 is not displayed in the first set decorative design 41A and the second set decorative design 41B in which the reach eye is not established, and the middle decoration The pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(5), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the development frame suggestion image 85 is sequentially displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and after inspiring which is selected, the third frame 81C (the third set of decorative patterns 41C ), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. Here, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in the third frame 81C (third group decorative pattern 41C), so that subsequent effects are executed using the third frame 81C (third group decorative pattern 41C). The player is informed (suggested) that the In addition, here, it has been described that one is selected from the four frames of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, that is, one of the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, for example, reach. It may be a mode in which one is selected from the third set decorative design 41C and the fourth set decorative design 41D in which the eyes are established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, with the transition image 60 being displayed, the decorative frame 81 and the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are hidden. On the other hand, the retained number display 55 and the fourth symbol 56 are maintained. This prevents the player from erroneously recognizing that the variation of the decorative design 41 has ended.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C selected in FIG. 62-1(5) are displayed in the corners (the upper left corner and the upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. It At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are a display mode with a small display mode and low decorativeness. More specifically, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed with a larger size than when they were displayed in the third frame 81C in FIG. 62-1(5). Further, the middle pattern of the third set decorative design 41C is not displayed. This ensures a large area for displaying the SP image 91. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained. After the transition image 60 is hidden, the first set decorative design 41A, the second set decorative design 41B, and the fourth set decorative design 41D other than the selected third set decorative design 41C are hidden. Is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing the stationary drawing effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "445". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "445", it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2(10), the decoration frame 81 is displayed, and the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. .. Here, the respective symbols displayed by the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D correspond to the respective undeveloped designs shown in FIG. 62-1(5). In other words, the same "4556" as before the development is displayed as the first set decorative design 41A, and "125" as the same as before development is displayed as the second set decorative design 41B. Further, as the third group decorative design 41C, "45" is displayed corresponding to the reach eyes displayed before the development. Further, as the fourth group decorative design 41D, "3-11" is displayed corresponding to the reach eyes displayed before the development. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2(11), the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special design. Further, "45" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the fourth design 56 and the third set decorative design 41C is in a state of being matched with the combination of "445".

In addition, in the variation effect example 5 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment, the four-divisional effect is being executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 62-1(1), the decorative design 41 is displayed in a manner that coincides with the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, that is, the variation start of the decorative design 41. This makes it possible to smoothly restart the variation of the decorative pattern 41.

Further, unlike the example shown in the figure, the special symbols are stopped and displayed without executing the 4-division effect, that is, as shown in FIG. 62-2(9), only the third set of decorative symbols 41C is used for the decorative symbol 41. When the final effect is executed, for the group of the decorative symbols 41 not selected (the first group decorative symbol 41A, the second group decorative symbol 41B, the fourth group decorative symbol 41D in the illustrated example), the player is a special symbol Cannot be confirmed when the stop display is displayed. On the other hand, since the player can confirm the set of the decorative symbols 41 not selected in the illustrated example, the player can be more satisfied with the effect.

In variation effect example 5, in the variation of one special symbol, the reach effect is executed in the third group decorative symbol 41C and the fourth group decorative symbol 41D, while the other decorative symbol 41 is a group. The reach effect is not executed in the first set decorative design 41A and the second set decorative design 41B. At this time, the first set decorative design 41A and the second set decorative design 41B are fixedly stopped at a combination of the decorative designs 41 in which the reach pattern is not established, that is, a so-called loose pattern. That is, in the variation of the one special symbol, after the reach effect, the special effect in which the combination of the decorative symbols 41 in which the reach eyes are not established is definitely displayed is executed.

[Variation example 6]
63-1 and 63-2 are diagrams showing an aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 63-1 and FIG. 63-2, the variation effect (variation effect example 6) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Variation production example 6 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability short time non-gaming state. Further, variation effect example 6 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Furthermore, the variation effect example 6 is an example of the variation effect when the four-division effect and the reach effect are executed. This fluctuating effect example 6 is an example of an effect corresponding to the fluctuating effect example 5, and in the following description, differences from the fluctuating effect example 5 will be mainly described, and points that coincide with the fluctuating effect example 5 will be described. May be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 63-1(1) and 63-1(2), the decoration frame 81 and the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are displayed in the image display unit 114, and each of them is displayed. The fluctuation starts from the state in which it is definitely stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(3), the left and right decorative designs 41 are provisionally stopped in each of the first to fourth set decorative designs 41A to 41D. Here, among the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D, the reach eyes are established in the second set decorative design 41B to the fourth set decorative design 41D. In addition, the medium decorative pattern 41 of the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D continues to be variably displayed at high speed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(4), among the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D, the reach in the second set decorative pattern 41B to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D in which the reach is established. The line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative design 41 of the second set decorative design 41B to the fourth set decorative design 41D continues to be variably displayed at high speed. Further, in the first set decorative design 41A in which the reach eye is not established, the reach line image 83 is not displayed, and the middle decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(5), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and after fanning which is selected, the third frame is displayed. The development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed so as to overlap with 81C (third group decorative pattern 41C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, with the transition image 60 being displayed, the decorative frame 81 and the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C are displayed in the corners (the upper left corner and the upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. Further, the middle pattern of the third set decorative design 41C is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing the stationary drawing effect. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "4,4,4". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in a combination of "4,4,4", it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2(10), with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Further, "44" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 is in a state of being matched with the combination of “4,4,4”. Note that, unlike the variation effect example 5, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41 is executed without executing the 4-division effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent water from being poured into the excited state of the player who has been notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

[Variation effect example 7]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a variation effect (variation effect example 7) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Variation production example 7 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the high probability time saving game state. Further, variation effect example 7 is a variation effect example when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(1), the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Be present. The right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the background is displayed on the image display unit 114 in a manner that suggests that it is in the high probability time saving game state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(3), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the combination "4, 36" of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in a stopped state shown in FIG. 64(3) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. Also, with the variation stop of the special symbol, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped. At this time, the combination of the fourth design 56 is “4,36”, which matches the combination of the decorative designs 41.

In the variation effect example 7, the decorative pattern 41 is fixedly stopped without going through a temporary stop. As a result, compared to, for example, a low-probability time-short non-gaming state, in a high-probability time-short gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short (for example, 2 seconds), it is possible to realize an effect by the decorative symbol 41.

[Variation effect example 8]
65-1 and 65-2 are diagrams showing an aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 65-1 and FIG. 65-2, the variation effect (variation effect example 8) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Variation production example 8 is a variation production example of the decorative symbol 41 in the high probability time saving game state. In addition, variation production example 8 is a variation production example when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 7 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 7 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65-1(1), the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(3), the left decorative design 41 is temporarily scrolled at a position which was fixedly stopped until the start of variation after scrolling at a low speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(4), the reach twisting effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative design 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same design (the number "four") as the left decorative design 41, and fuels whether to temporarily stop with the same design as the left decorative design 41. To execute.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(5), the reach effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative design 41 that was scrolling at a low speed is temporarily stopped at the position that was definitely stopped until the start of the fluctuation. At this time, the left and right decorative designs 41 execute reach-time packaging effect. Specifically, the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden along with the transition image 60 being displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed at the corners of the image display area in the image display unit 114, and the middle decorative design 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness while performing the stationary design effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "445". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "445", it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2(10), with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Further, "45" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 is in a state of being matched with the combination of “454”. When the special design is stopped and displayed, the decorative design 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness. That is, as shown in FIG. 65-1(1), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a manner that coincides with the start of variation of the decorative pattern 41. This makes it possible to smoothly restart the variation of the decorative pattern 41.

[Variation example 9]
66-1 and 66-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 and 66-2. Variation effect example 9 is a variation effect example of the decorative symbol 41 in the high probability time saving game state. Further, variation effect example 9 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It should be noted that this fluctuating effect example 9 is an effect example corresponding to the fluctuating effect example 8, and in the following description, differences from the fluctuating effect example 8 will be mainly described, and points that coincide with the fluctuating effect example 8. May be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 66-1(1) to 66-1(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 starts from the state in which the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness is definitely stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the reach fueling effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 66-1(5) to 66-1(8), the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are executed in the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness while performing the stationary design effect. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is in a state of being temporarily stopped in the combination of "4,4,4". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in a combination of "4,4,4", it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2(10), with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Further, "44" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 is in a state of being matched with the combination of “4,4,4”. When the special design is stopped and displayed, the decorative design 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness.

[Variation effect example 10]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variation effect (variation effect example 10) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 10 is an example of an effect executed at the start of the 4-division effect. Further, the variation effect example 10 is an example of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the low probability time-short gaming state. Further, variation effect example 10 is a variation effect example when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. Furthermore, variation production example 10 is an example of variation production in the case where the four-division production is executed and the reach production is not executed. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 having high decorativeness in the image display unit 114 as the change of the previous special symbol ends. Be present. At this time, the 4-division effect is not executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 67(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(3), the introduction image 94 is displayed by the effect control unit 300. In other words, by displaying the introduction image 94, it is suggested to the player that the four-division effect is executed. Here, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden along with the introduction image 94 being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the introduction image 94.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(4), the effect control unit 300 hides the introductory image 94, displays the decorative frame 81, and displays the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the first set decorative pattern. 41A to 4th group decorative design 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are in a state of being variably displayed at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(5), the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(6), the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special design. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D simultaneously execute fixed stop. In addition, “2, 13” is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the fourth symbol 56 and the third set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of being matched with the combination of "213".

[Variation effect example 11]
68-1 and 68-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 68-1 and FIG. 68-2, the variation effect (variation effect example 11) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 11 is an example of an effect executed at the start of the 4-division effect.

In addition, the variation production example 11 is a low-probability-time-short game-free state (first low-probability-time short-game-free state) to a high-probability-time short-game state and then a low-probability-time-short-game-free state (second low-probability-time-short-game-free state). It is an example of a variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 which returns to FIG. In addition, variation production example 11 is a variation production example when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit in the first low-probability time saving non-gaming state. Furthermore, in the fluctuating effect example 11, it is an example of a fluctuating effect in which the 4-division effect is executed in the second low-probability time saving short game state. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 68-1(1), the effect control unit 300 decorates the image display unit 114 with the end of the variation of the special symbol executed in the first low-probability time saving non-gaming state. It is assumed that the decorative pattern 41 having high property is fixedly stopped in the combination of "4,4,4". That is, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit for the player. At this time, the four-division effect is not executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(2), with the start of the jackpot game, the effect name notification image 95 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The effect name notification image 95 in the illustrated example includes a character string of “SUPER straightening bonus”. At this time, the right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the decorative design 41 is not displayed on the image display unit 114. Similarly, the variation image 51, the hold image 52, the hold number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56 are not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(3), the round image 96 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as the special winning opening 125 (see FIG. 1) is opened. The illustrated round image 96 includes characters “Round1” indicating that the round game currently being executed in the jackpot game is the first time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(4), with the start of the final round in the jackpot game, a round image 96 including the characters "Final Round" indicating the current round game is displayed on the image display unit 114. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(5), the ending image 97 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the end of the final round. By displaying the ending image 97, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the jackpot game is over. Further, by displaying the ending image 97, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit is also suggested (notified). The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the effect mode set after the jackpot, and the character string of "probability variation mode entry!!" that suggests (notifies) that the effect mode is set. Here, in the illustrated example, the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high-probability time shortened gaming state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(6), with the jackpot game ending, the gaming state shifts from the low probability time short non-gaming state to the high probability time short gaming state. At this time, the combination “4,4,4” of the jackpotted decorative patterns 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a large display mode and a display mode with low decorativeness.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(7), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(8), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination "1556" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Also, with the variation stop of the special symbol, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2(9), with the start of the variable display of the last special symbol in the high-probability time short game state, that is, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol with the lottery number J=0. The variation of the decorative pattern 41 is started. At this time, the end suggestion image 98 is displayed on the image display unit 114.
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2(10), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “4-21” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 58(7) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out. Also, with the variation stop of the special symbol, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2(11), the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed as the gaming state shifts from the high-probability-time short game state to the low-probability time-short gaming state. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden along with the probability variation mode end image 99 being displayed. By displaying the probability variation mode end image 99, it is informed that the game state will shift to the low probability time saving mode. Further, the probability change mode end image 99 is displayed to notify that the four-division effect will be executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (12), the effect control unit 300 makes the probability variation mode end image 99 non-display, the decorative frame 81 is displayed, and the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D are respectively displayed. The 1st set decorative design 41A to the 4th set decorative design 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are in a state of being variably displayed at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2(13), the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state where the three symbols are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2(14), the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special design. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D simultaneously execute fixed stop. In addition, “2, 13” is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the fourth symbol 56 and the third set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of being matched with the combination of "213".

[Variation effect example 12]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation effect (variation effect example 12) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the fluctuating effect example 12 is an example of an effect when the power is cut off and restored while the four-division effect is being executed. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the low probability time-short non-gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of the variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. In the following description, the points that are different from the variable effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variable effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 69(1) and 69(2), the decorative frame 81 and the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are displayed on the image display unit 114, and they are fixedly stopped. The fluctuation starts from the state where it is present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(3), when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and restored, and a command regarding power-on is transmitted from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The image 89 during power restoration is displayed. More specifically, the image/acoustic control unit 310 that has received the power-on command from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the power-restoring image 89.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(4), the effect control unit 300 issues a command indicating that the power recovery is completed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power recovery in progress image 89 is displayed. Send a certain power recovery end command. The image/sound control unit 310 that has received this power restoration completion command causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like. At this time, unlike before the power is restored, the four-division effect is not executed. The decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 to be displayed are initial designs (default designs) that are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed in a combination of "1 23".

As described above, when the power is restored in the state where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner in the 4-divisional effect, the decorative pattern 41 is set to 1 without executing the 4-divisional effect after the power-restoring image 89 is displayed. The group is displayed. In other words, the execution of the 4-division effect is reset when the power is restored. In other words, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes as the power is restored.

[Variation example 13]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the variation effect (variation effect example 13) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 12 is an example of an effect when the power is cut off and restored in the high probability time saving game state. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of the variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 7 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 7 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(1), with the effect control unit 300, the variation of the previous special symbol is ended, and the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Be present.
Then, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70(3), when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored to power and a command regarding power-on is transmitted from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a power-recovering image. 89 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the effect control unit 300 issues a command indicating that the power recovery is completed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power recovery in progress image 89 is displayed. Send a certain power recovery end command. The image/sound control unit 310 that has received this power restoration completion command causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed, as before the restoration of the power supply. Also, the four-division effect is not executed. Further, the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 to be displayed are initial designs which are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored.

As described above, when the power is restored in a state in which the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness in the high-probability time short game state is being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is 1 after the power recovery image 89 is displayed. The group is displayed. In other words, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is maintained even when the power is restored.

[Relationship 1 of production]
Here, the relationship between the variable effects in the variable effect examples 5 and 7 will be described. When the variable effect example 5 shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2 is compared with the variable effect example 7 shown in FIG. 64, the time in which the three symbols in the decorative symbol 41 are displayed together is different. For example, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variation effect example 5 is a development frame suggestion image after the middle decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and three symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 62-1(4). After passing through the effect of displaying 85, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect by the third group decorative symbol 41C, the fixed stop is fixed with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 5 is definitely stopped without going through a temporary stop (see FIG. 64(3)). Therefore, comparing the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 7, the time for which the three symbols to be definitely stopped are displayed together is longer in the variation effect example 5. .. To further explain, comparing the case where the four-division effect is executed and the case of the high probability time saving game state, there are three symbols that are definitely stopped when the four-division effect is executed. The displayed time is long. In this way, the time for which the three symbols are displayed together becomes long, so that the time for the player to confirm each set of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in plural by executing the four-division effect is secured. be able to.

The time when the three symbols are displayed together is the total time of the temporary stop and the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41, but any of the temporary stop time and the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41. It may be either one. Here, the time in which the three symbols are displayed together is the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols of the decorative symbol 41 to be fixedly stopped to the fixed stop. To further explain, at the time when the three symbols are displayed together, the display of each of the three symbols is not switched to another symbol.

In addition, the state where the three symbols of the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 are aligned is a state in which the intermediate ornamental symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and the three symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 62-1(4). After that, it can be regarded as continuing even during execution of the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect by the third group decorative design 41C. In addition, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the fluctuating effect example 5 can be regarded as a so-called loose effect in which the reach effect is not executed.

Further, unlike the description of the variation effect example 7 shown in FIG. 64, as a variation effect example of the decorative symbol 41 in the high-probability time shortening game state, there is also a mode in which the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped after being temporarily stopped. Comparing this aspect with the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5, the time period from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is longer in the variation effect example 5. To further explain, in comparison with the case where the four-division effect is being executed in the low-probability time-short non-gaming state and the case where it is the high-probability time-short gaming state, the four-division effect is executed in the low-probability time-short gaming state If there are three symbols, the time from the temporary stop to the final stop is longer.

Here, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variation production example 5 is in the high-probability time shortening game state, and three symbols are temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the so-called rose separation in which the reach production is not executed is executed. It takes a long time from to the fixed stop. Further, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 is a high probability time saving game state, and is fixed after three symbols are temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are executed. It takes a long time to stop.

Further, the second group decorative design 41B in the variation production example 5 and the decorative design 41 in the variation production example 7 can be regarded as different display modes of the respective designs. More specifically, the second group decorative pattern 41B in the fluctuating effect example 5 and the decorative pattern 41 in the fluctuating effect example 7 can be regarded as having different display modes of decorativeness mainly of the identification characters. Further, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the fluctuating effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the fluctuating effect example 7 can be regarded as having different arrangements of symbols even if they have the same number. Here, the array means the position of the area where each image is displayed on the image display unit 114. The array is not limited to the position of the area in the image display unit 114, but includes the dimensions and the positional relationship of the area in which each image is displayed.

In addition, in the illustrated example, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 7 have the same symbol numbers but in the first mode (normal mode 1, low probability). State, non-time saving state, etc.) and the second mode (normal mode 2, high-accuracy state, time saving state, 4 split effect execution mode, etc.) can be considered as an example of a mode in which the arrangement for displaying the decorative pattern 41 is different. it can.

In addition, the fluctuation time, which is the time in which the three symbols that are definitely stopped are displayed together, is longer in the fluctuation effect example 5 than in the fluctuation effect example 7. On the other hand, the degree of expectation is lower in the variable effect example 5 than in the variable effect example 7. That is, in the case of using the second aspect as in the variation effect example 7, as compared with the case of using the first aspect as in the variation effect example 5, a time period in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. Is short and has a high expectation of a big hit. By adopting such a configuration, in the game production, the excitement of the game is enhanced by prolonging the swing fluctuation time, and the expectation is increased depending on the situation even if the swing fluctuation time is short. Can provide surprises and fun.

[Relationship 2 of production]
Next, the relationship between the variable effects in the variable effect examples 4 and 8 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61 with the variation effect example 8 shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, in the variation effect example 4, the reach-inspiring effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example. In 8, the reach-inspiring effect is executed. To further explain, comparing the case where the 4-divisional effect is executed with the case of the high probability time saving game state, the probability that the reach-inspiring effect is executed when the 4-divisional effect is executed Is low. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach agitation effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach agitation effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach agitation effect in the high-probability time shortened gaming state is executed includes that the reach agitation effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, the reach-time drawing effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 8, the reach-time drawing effect is executed. To further explain, comparing the case where the 4-divisional effect is executed and the case of the high probability time saving game state, the reach-time drawing effect is executed when the 4-divisional effect is executed. Probability is low. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach-time drawing effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach-time drawing effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach time schematic drawing effect in the high-probability time shortened gaming state is executed includes that the reach time schematic drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, if the 4-split effect is executed, even if the leech-inspiring effect or the reach-time-design drawing effect is executed, the effect that is obtained when the 4-split effect is not executed is obtained. Absent. Therefore, the control by the effect control unit 300 can be simplified by not executing the reach-inspiring effect and the reach-time-use drawing effect when the 4-division effect is being executed (or by reducing the execution probability).

It should be noted that the execution probability here indicates a ratio of executing the target effect, and is not limited to a specific probability. For example, it may be a ratio of the number of effect patterns in which the target effect is executed, in the total number of all effect patterns executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100. Further, for example, the effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be observed a predetermined number of times, and the ratio of the number of times the target effect is executed to the predetermined number of times may be used.

In addition, in the case of executing the reach aspiration effect and the reach time outline drawing effect in the high probability time saving game state, it is more special after the reach is established than in the case of executing the reach aspiration effect and the reach time outline illustration effect in the 4-divisional effect. The game is easy to be executed.

Further, the reach-inspiring effect is such that the effect is applied to the decorative design 41, the time when the decorative design 41 is displayed is longer than other display time, a design different from the reach design slides down, The design (for example, NEXT design, pseudo-relational design, continuous production design) can be rendered as a stop, and can be grasped as a production that fuels whether or not the reach is reached.

Further, in the first mode (high-probability time shortening game state), the ratio of advantageous hits (big hits that become high-probability state after the end of big-hit game) is the ratio of disadvantageous hits (big hits that become low-probability state after the end of big-jack game) It may be higher, and the special effect may be more likely to succeed with a disadvantageous winning design than an advantageous winning design.

In addition, the decorative pattern 41 is the second one rather than the case where the special effect (reach inclining effect or reach time installation effect) is executed when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first display mode (mode with high decorativeness). The special game is easier to perform when the special effect is executed when the display is performed in the second mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of the variable effect example 4) of the display modes (the mode of low decorativeness). Good. Further, the decorative pattern 41 is a first mode (for example, a mode of low decorativeness) of the second display mode (a mode with low decorativeness), as compared with the case where the special effect is reach success when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first display mode. The special game may be more difficult to perform when the reach is successful in the special effect when displayed with the decorative design 41 of the variation effect example 8).

Further, before the reach is established, that is, before the reach effect is executed, the first pattern (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of the variation effect example 8) is the The movable accessory 115 may be easier to operate than the two modes (for example, see the decorative pattern 41 of the variation effect example 4).

Further, in the first mode (high-probability time/short game state), the possibility of failing to reach the reach and not reaching the reach may be higher than in the second mode (low-probability time/short game state). Further, in the first mode (high-probability time shortened gaming state), the possibility of not reaching reach success by performing the reach-inspiring effect may be higher than the possibility of reaching reach success by performing the reach-inspiring effect. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the first mode (high-probability time/short game state) than in the second mode (low-probability time/short game state) in the variation in which reach-inspiring production is performed and reach is successful. Good. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the second mode (low-probability time/short game state) than in the first mode (high-probability time/short game state) in the variation in which reach-inspiring production is performed and reach is successful. Good.

[Relationship 3 of production]
Next, the relationship between the variable effects in the variable effect examples 1 and 5 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 1 shown in FIG. 58 with the variation effect example 5 shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2, both are in the low probability short time non-gaming state and in the same gaming state. On the other hand, the decorative design 41 in the fluctuating effect example 1 is highly decorative, and the second set decorative pattern 41B in the fluctuating effect example 5 is low in decorative property. Further, both the variable effect example 1 and the variable effect example 5 have different times when the three symbols in the decorative symbol 41 are displayed together. For example, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variation effect example 5 is an effect of displaying the development frame suggestion image 85 after the three symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 62-1(4), After the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect by the third group decorative symbol 41C, the fixed stop is accompanied by the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative design 41 in the fluctuating effect example 1 is fixedly stopped without passing through the SP reach effect after the three symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 58(6) (FIG. 58( 7)). Therefore, when the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 1 are compared, the variation effect example 5 has a longer time in which the three symbols to be definitely stopped are displayed together. .. To further explain, comparing the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 with the decorative symbol 41 of the variable effect example 1, the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is variable effect. Example 5 is longer. In this way, the time for which the three symbols are displayed together becomes long, so that the player can confirm each set of the decorative symbols 41 in which the four-division effect is executed and a plurality of them are displayed. The time when the three symbols are displayed together is the total time of the temporary stop and the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41, but either the time of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41 or the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41. It may be either one. Here, the time when the three symbols are displayed together is the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols of the decorative symbol 41 to be fixedly stopped to the fixed stop. To further explain, at the time when the three symbols are displayed together, the state in which the three symbols are displayed is maintained and the display is not switched to another symbol.

[Relationship 4]
Next, the relationship between the variable effects in the above-described variable effect examples 2 and 4 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 2 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2 with the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61, both are in the low probability short time non-gaming state and in the same gaming state. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61, the reach agitation effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 2 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, the reach agitation effect is executed. Comparing the case where the 4-split effect is executed and the case where the 4-split effect is not executed, the probability that the reach-inspiring effect is executed is lower when the 4-split effect is executed. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach agitation effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach agitation effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach agitation effect is executed includes that the reach agitation effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, the reach-time drawing effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 2, the reach-time drawing effect is executed. To further explain, comparing the case where the 4-divisional effect is executed and the case where the 4-divisional effect is not executed, the reach-time drawing effect is executed when the 4-divisional effect is executed. The probability of being killed is low. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach-time drawing effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach-time drawing effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach-time drawing effect is executed when the 4-division effect is not executed includes that the reach-time drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, if the 4-split effect is executed, even if the leech-inspiring effect or the reach-time-design drawing effect is executed, the effect that is obtained when the 4-split effect is not executed is obtained. Absent. Therefore, the control by the effect control unit 300 can be simplified by not performing the reach tilt effect or the reach-time drawing effect when the 4-division effect is being executed.

[Relationship 5]
Next, the relationship between the variable effects in the variable effect examples 10 and 11 will be described. When comparing the variable effect example 10 shown in FIG. 67 with the variable effect example 11 shown in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, the time at which the player is informed that the four-division effect is executed, that is, the notice effect The duration of is longer in the variation effect example 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(3), in comparison with the time when the introductory image 94 is displayed without switching the gaming state in the low probability time saving no gaming state, it is shown in FIG. 68-2(11). As described above, the time period in which the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed at the time of shifting from the high-probability time-short game state to the low-probability time-short game state is longer. As a result, as compared with the variation effect example 10 shown in FIG. 67, for example, as compared with the case where the decorative pattern 41 is switched from the high decorative state to the low decorative state, FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2. It is possible to further emphasize the effect that is executed while switching the effect patterns with low decorativeness like the variable effect example 11 shown in FIG. To further explain, by prolonging the time for which the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed, it is possible to suggest that a four-divisional effect gives a surprise and a good sense, and it is possible to encourage the player.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 68-1(6), the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the high-probability time short game state is a decorative pattern 41 (FIG. 67) when the four-division effect is executed because of low decorativeness. (See (5)). Further, the time when the ending image 97, which is an image notifying that the high probability time saving game state is started (see FIG. 68-1(5)), is an image notifying that the four-division effect is executed. Is longer than the time when the introductory image 94 is displayed (see FIG. 67(3)).

〔command〕
By the way, although the description is omitted in the above, in order to electrically connect the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, a cable (not shown) for transmitting a control signal (command), a game control board and an effect. A connector provided on each of the control boards and receiving terminals of a cable (not shown) is used. Here, although the terminal of the cable is inserted into the connector, when the electrical connection between the cable and the connector is insufficient (so-called half-stabbing state), between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. When an irregular event such as a communication error occurs, the effect control unit 300 may miss the control signal transmitted by the game control unit 200. In other words, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 300 may not be able to receive the control signal from the game control unit 200.

In this way, when the control signal is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, an effect different from the variable effect example described above may be executed. More specifically, for example, after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation stop command may not be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61(4), the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are not in the state of being fixedly stopped, and as shown in FIG. 61(3), the first set decorative pattern The state in which the symbols 41A to 4th set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped continues. That is, when the variation stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the variation stop command is transmitted. The time I spend is longer. To explain further, the decorative symbol 41 oscillates for a longer time than in the case where the control signal is not missed.

In addition, the variation stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 61(3), the temporary stop by the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D continues. When the production control unit 300 receives a command other than the variation stop command such as the next variation start command or customer waiting command from the game control unit 200 in the state where the production control unit 300 is performing, the production according to the received command is executed.

In addition, in the state where the above-mentioned command is missed and the decorative pattern is still swinging, the fluctuation stop command accompanying the fluctuation of the special symbol after the fluctuation stop command originally received is changed. Upon reception, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the swinging decorative pattern 41. In this case, the time from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 to the final stop becomes longer than in the case where the command is not missed.

Although not described above, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 displayed after the power is restored are displayed without fluctuation or swing. To explain further, the decorative pattern 41 displayed after the power supply is restored is in a fixed stop state.

Originally, the effect control unit 300 maintains the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in response to receiving the fluctuation stop command. On the other hand, after the power is restored, the state in which the decorative design is definitely stopped is maintained beyond this predetermined time. That is, the decorative pattern 41 may be fixedly stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Further, as will be described in detail later, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 is updated at each predetermined frame update timing. At this frame update timing, the process of drawing the image is executed, but when a so-called processing omission occurs in which part of the process to be executed is not executed, the image continues until the next frame update timing. Is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(3), the state in which the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped continues. More specifically, when the processing omission occurs, the time during which the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are temporarily stopped becomes longer than when the processing omission does not occur. In addition, the timing at which sounds such as music and voice are output from the speaker 156 does not change depending on whether the processing omission occurs or not.

Further, in the above description, the character of the decorative pattern 41 has been described to move when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing, when changing stops, or in the reach-time drawing effect. The motion of the character performed at each of these timings may be different at each timing. Also, the motion of the character may change according to the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, the special action performed by the character may be performed more easily when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit than when it is out of alignment. That is, a special action of the character may suggest that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit.

The four-division effect may be executed according to the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the four-division effect may be executed more easily (the execution ratio may be higher) than when the result is a big hit. Here, the pre-determination may be set not to be executed in a predetermined case (so-called prohibition). For example, when the gaming state changes, such as when switching from the high-probability time-short gaming state to the low-probability time-short non-gaming state, or when the gaming state changes such as the low-probability time-short gaming state to the low-probability time-short non-gaming state, the prior determination is not executed. Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, when switching from the high-probability time-short gaming state to the low-probability time-short gaming state, in order to maintain the player's interest, a four-division effect May be set to always be executed. In such a setting, for example, when the four-division effect is executed in a scene not accompanied by the switching of the game state as shown in FIG. 63-1 and FIG. 63-2, it may be executed based on the advance determination. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the 4-divisional effect is relatively high. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, when the four-division effect is executed in the scene accompanied by the switching of the game state, the four-division effect is not included because the case is not executed based on the preliminary determination. The expectation of is relatively low.

[Modification]
In the above description, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(3), the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are temporarily stopped in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D that are changing may be definitely stopped without being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the above description, it is explained that the reach tilting effect and the reach-time design drawing effect are not executed when the 4-division effect is being executed, but the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D are One or both of the reach agitation effect and the reach time plan effect may be executed.

Further, in the above description, in the four-division effect, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, it has been described that the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. It is not limited to this. For example, the first set decorative design 41A to the fourth set decorative design 41D may be temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, for example, in each of the first to fourth decorative patterns 41A to 41D, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped in order. Thereafter, the development frame suggestion image 85 may be displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and the selection may be encouraged.

Although not described above, the respective backgrounds of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division effect may be different from each other, or may be composed of a common background. For example, a mode may be used in which one image such as one map is formed by the backgrounds in the four frames of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D.

Although not described above, a fusuma image that covers each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D may be displayed in the four-division effect. For example, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, an image in which the fusuma images are closed at once is displayed, and after the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are covered with the fusuma images. Alternatively, only the fusuma image in the developing frame may be opened. In addition, such a fusuma image may be used instead of the development frame suggestion image 85. When white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the color of the fusuma image, the expectation may be set higher in the later order.

Further, in the above description, it is explained that the four-division effect is not executed in the high-probability time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the high-probability time saving game state, four-divisional effect may be executed according to the result of the lottery using the effect random number which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25(a).

Here, when the four-division effect is executed and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment, the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed is fixedly stopped as compared with the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. 3 The probability that the temporary stop time after one symbol is displayed may be long may be high. Here, the high probability that the temporary stop time after the three symbols of the fixed stop are displayed is long includes that the temporary stop time is always long, that is, the probability is 100%.

Further, when the four-division effect is executed and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment, the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed is more stationary than the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. The execution probability of may be high. Here, the high execution probability of the stationary drawing effect includes that the stationary drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the above description, it is explained that various effect images are hidden. Here, instead of hiding the various effect images, for example, the color and the transparency of the effect image may be changed to reduce the visibility.

Further, in the above, as the decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness, a configuration having the number element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413, and as the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness, the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 are provided. Although the configuration in which the character element 413 is provided but the character element 413 is not provided is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern 41 having high decorativeness may be configured to include an effect image element such as a so-called aura in addition to the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, for example, the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness may include a design such as a mark (for example, a hexagon) in addition to the numeral elements 411 and 412. The decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness can be regarded as a display mode mainly including the numerical elements 411.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the following, for convenience of description, each component will be described with a new reference numeral. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment described later, the same reference numerals may be given to different members.
(Structure of game machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b on the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is used as a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper, etc.) to the island facility of a game store. ) Fixed through.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism section 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 including a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower tray 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not flowed into the upper tray 11 and flowed into the overflow ball flow passage described later, and the game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The sound output device 9 is provided at two places on the upper portion of the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like so as to produce a sound (music, voice). It has become. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening portion 8, and produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp (LED) and the emission color. Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

The upper tray 11 has a bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball inclined downward toward the direction of the launching operation device 13 (to the right), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 71) that function as an input device for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various productions described later are provided in the central front side portion of the upper tray 11. They are arranged side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 72) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 72) having a button drive motor for moving 17 vertically is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is connected to the cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19). (See FIG. 72) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation of gaming balls and a returning operation of a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining amount of money is provided in the rightward portion of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball. When the return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving the game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 72) that detects that the lower saucer 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower saucer 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. While is detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

The firing operating device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 72), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 72) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is actuated and the game balls are fed one by one.

The handle light-emitting device 15c forms a front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner. Further, at the front end portion of the handle light emitting device 15c, a blower port 15d which is a blowout port for wind (air) blown out from a blower device 21 described later is provided.

On the back surface side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 is provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 for blowing out wind (air) in a predetermined manner. The blower device 21 includes a blower unit (not shown) for blowing the wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower unit, and the blower unit sends the wind (air) blown by the blower unit (air). ) Is sent toward the player's hand from the blower port 15d through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the handle light emitting device 15c. By operating the blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blower effect in which wind (air) is blown toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15 in a predetermined manner.

It should be noted that the blower device 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate 2b portion of the outer frame 2 or the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 to provide wind (air) to the player. ) May be sent out. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

In the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an opening at the front in the approximate center of the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 through the opening are provided behind the game machine 1. Face.

The game ball launching device 26 directs a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 72) for driving the launching member 28, and the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A launch rail 29 that inclines upward is provided, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A is provided at a launch position that is the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29. When the game ball sent by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the action of the launching member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when the exclusive key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding a game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, there is formed a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an outlet 39 for guiding the flowing down game balls to the outside of the game area (collection section of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a.

A frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game sphere into the inside, which is a so-called center case, is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a, and the effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the interior of the decorative frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at a lower portion of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 that rolls down the game balls introduced into the inside of the table and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can be always won (winning) are provided at intervals. When a game ball that has won (entered) 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is delivered to the upper tray 11 as a sphere.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided universal figure gates 44 (universal figure starting areas) through which game balls can pass. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 72), a normal symbol hit lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

Directly below the stage part 42 below the game area 5a, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can always win (ball entry) is provided, and the first starting opening 45 is provided. When a game ball that has won (entered) is detected by the first start opening detection switch 45a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as an award ball on the upper tray. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Immediately below the first starting opening 45, a game ball is closed from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for a normal symbol). The variable starter 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which a prize (ball entry) is possible or easy.

In the variable starting portion 46, a second starting opening 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (win) and a second detecting a winning of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 47 (winning) A starting opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 72), a movable member 48 for converting (changing) the second starting opening 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting opening/closing solenoid for opening/closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 72) are provided. Then, when the second starting opening 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting opening 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won ( It is possible or easy to enter.

In addition, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second start opening 47 is detected by the second start opening detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are recognized as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is designed to be paid out to the upper tray 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side universal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball).

The variable winning portion 49 has a big winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a big winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 50 (drawing). 72), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (changing) the special winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 51. When the special winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won a prize (ball) in the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as an award ball. It is paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball passage 52 (not shown) is provided for allowing the game balls detected by the second start opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a to be received and collected while flowing down.

Further, in the downstream portion of the winning ball passage 52, there is provided a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a (see FIG. 72) for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball passage 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects again the game ball after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the special winning opening detection switch 50a. Is used to determine whether the prize is a proper prize (ball) or an abnormal prize (ball).

On the outside of the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol hold display device 63, a second special symbol Symbol holding display 64, and. Hold display device consisting of the normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 72) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special A right-handed indicator 67 (see FIG. 72) is provided for urging the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the (gaming state) or the time saving game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball entry). The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the second starting opening 47 (ball). It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal lottery lottery that is performed on the condition that the game ball is won (ball) in the universal figure gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is to obtain a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting opening 45, and obtains the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to comparing with the determination value and determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Be seen. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is to obtain a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second starting opening 47, and the obtained jackpot determination random number value and jackpot. It corresponds to comparing with the determination value and determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Be seen. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each configured by a plurality of LEDs, and the LED of the corresponding display device in the variable display of each special symbol blinks at a predetermined interval or order. To do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (a big-hit mode, a lost-mode) showing the result of each big-hit lottery.

In the present embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit lottery of the first special symbol (special game determination), or a big hit lottery of the second special symbol (special game determination), big hit game (special game state) The state of having acquired the right to execute. The "big hit game (special game state)" means a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

It should be noted that the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, but even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player who is likely to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

Ordinary symbol hit lottery is a "hit" by obtaining a hit determination random number value when the game ball passes through the public figure gate 44 and comparing the obtained hit determination random number value with the hit determination value. It corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of the regular symbols, the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery (a winning mode or a losing mode).

In the present embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery for ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are set in advance, the second starting port 47 is opened even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the starting condition of the variable display is easily established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol hold display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol of the first start symbol 45 stored in the game ball winning (ball)) This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memory) for performing the variable display, and is turned on or blinks in a mode showing the number of first reserved memories. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first reserved storages is four, but the number may be smaller or larger than four.

The second special symbol hold display 64 is configured by a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (when the second special symbol is stored when the game ball wins (ball)) in the second starting opening 47 This is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing the variable display, and is turned on or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four second storages are stored, the number of second storages may be smaller or larger than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the right to perform a random lottery of the normal symbol (variable display of the regular symbol) that is stored when the game ball wins (passes) the universal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (general figure pending storage), and is turned on or blinking in a mode showing the number of general figure pending storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four general-use figure storages are stored, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

The first special symbol display device 60 and/or the second special symbol display device 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the jackpot lottery for special symbols, "7" is displayed as a stop, and if it is lost, "-" is displayed as a stop. It is good to repeat ". Before the variable display of the special symbol is started, the result of the previous stop of the variable display is displayed by the lighting of the LED. Therefore, when the variable display is started, the variable display is started by turning off the LED. It will be easier to understand that it has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display is provided in the interior of the effect space 40a, and in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), which is a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), is provided, and the face of the character is provided above the effect space 40a. A movable effect member 73 simulating the above is provided.
In the present embodiment, the “first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)” and the “second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)” may be collectively referred to as “image display device”.

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) display various effects according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demonstration effect that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed or the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is performed or the notice by the character There are staging, etc.

In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is a panel drive configured by a solenoid, a motor and the like during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). By using the device 75 (see FIG. 72) to move, it is possible to perform a moving effect.

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located closer to the end (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the central position (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The moving effect is performed by vertically moving (raising or lowering) between the effect position (second position) located at. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

Further, in the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area are formed, and each variable display area is formed. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling the effect symbol 70a displayed in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and variable display of special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. The variation display of the effect design 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronizing with). That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped corresponding to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. It should be noted that, as the effect design 70a, in addition to a design showing numbers, a design showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is adapted to be stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner (a lost manner, a big hit manner, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as "357", and the lose mode is the other modes. is there. Note that the manner in which the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (spins) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect design 70a, according to the result of the jackpot lottery, the reach effect, the background image, various effect images such as characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot (special gaming state) (hereinafter, referred to as “a jackpot winning expectation”) is increased.

Here, with the reach effect, a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols 70a are changed to give the player an expectation for the big hit. It means a variation mode. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect design 70a of "777" is set as the combination of the effect designs 70a for notifying the big hit (big hit result mode), the two effect designs 70a are set in the left side area and the right side area. It temporarily stops at "7" and the remaining effect design 70a is changing in the central area.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a sways slightly or the effect design 70a is slightly deformed to make the player think that the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stop). Not) say the aspect.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects, namely, "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which a background image before the normal reach effect is being displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and one effect symbol 70a is left in the central area. It is a fluctuating reach production.

The "SP reach effect" is a movie (moving image for a longer time than a movie related to the normal reach effect, in which two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is changed in the central area. , Animation, etc.).

“SPSP reach production” means that two production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region, and the remaining one production symbol 70a is changed in the central region, and is longer than the movie related to the SP reach production (long feature). Is a reach production in which movies (movies, animations, etc.) flow.

The "full-rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit are complete. In the present embodiment, the reach effect is executed only when the big hit lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <all rotation reach effect (big hit confirmation).

Further, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), in order to display the number of first holding icons corresponding to the first special symbol holding number (U1) which is the current number of the first holding memories. First hold icon display area 70B, and a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of the current second hold storages. And, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first holding icons corresponding to the first special symbol holding number (U1) are displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons is also increased/decreased corresponding to the increase/decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display 70B1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display 70B2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed next, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third in the third display unit 70B3. A first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and a fourth hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is fourthly displayed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. To be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and On the display units 70D1 to 70D4, the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) are displayed. That is, the number of the second hold icons is also increased/decreased in response to the increase/decrease in the second special symbol hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed next, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display portion 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. To be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special symbol reservation number" as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), or the second icon. The icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display portion 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (erases). In addition, you may make the said icon disappear in the middle of the variable display of the special design (effect design 70a). In the present embodiment, the “first hold icon”, the “second hold icon”, and the “corresponding icon” may be collectively referred to as “icon”.

The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs or the like) during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light emission effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with a board drive device 75 (see FIG. 72) configured by a solenoid, a motor, and the like.

Specifically, a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) are caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission color in accordance with the progress state of the variable display of the effect design 70a so that the light emission effect is performed. In addition, a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a central position (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A moving effect is performed by moving (up and down) in the vertical direction between the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that light emission production and movement production may be performed by operation of the production button 17.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main controller 110A (not shown) that has a main control board 110 that totally controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) having a payout control substrate 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control substrate 110, and a production control command from the main control substrate 110. Effect control device 130A (not shown) that has a built-in effect control board 130 that controls effects according to the above, and power supply device 160A (not shown) that has a power supply board 160 that supplies a power supply voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 72) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the gaming machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operation). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has a chip microcomputer 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and executes the arithmetic processing relating to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays). Control device, and sends a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 are configured so that commands (data) can be bidirectionally communicated, and the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 are communicated with each other. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

At the input port of the main control board 110, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a big winning opening detecting switch 50a, a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. The magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RAM clear switch 55a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110, the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, the special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special Design hold display 63, second special design hold display 64, normal design hold display 65, number of rounds display 66, right-handed display 67, game information output terminal board 90, and production control board 130, etc. are connected. Has been done. A drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, a display control signal for controlling various indicators, and a game information output terminal board that notifies the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the output port. Information is output.

The payout control board 120 is a sub-control board that controls the payout of the game balls based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the launch of the game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout controller 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game balls, and a launch controller 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, and an output port. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. 100 is controlled, or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, or the like.

In the input port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. Etc. are connected, and the payout motor 100b provided in the gaming ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a is used. When the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized. When it detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is changed by the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing strength is set according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the turning shaft. When the turning shaft rotates, the hitting member 28 turns and hits the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls performance related to the game (performed by the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main. Liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), and the like, the display/audio control unit 140, the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the air blower. 21, a lamp/drive control unit 150 for controlling the board lighting device 74, the board driving device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and uses the sub RAM 130c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect, thereby receiving a command from the main control board 110. Control is performed to cause various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to perform various effects in accordance with input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a ( Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Or perform control to cause the voice output device 9 to output a predetermined voice.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). An image control unit 145 composed of a video display processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, a frame buffer provided inside the image control unit 145, and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, and the like. It has a VRAM 147 that it has, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 that stores voice data and the like, and an input/output port.

The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving from the effect control unit 130m. In accordance with the effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 or the audio control unit 148 performs control for outputting various effects (outputs data or commands).

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list including a drawing control command group, and an animation of effect patterns. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the concrete contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of luminance.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data which is a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect design image, a background image forming the background of the effect design. Material data representing individual images such as a character image and a serif image. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data that represents an image of the entire frame configured by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) and the like, which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read by the image control unit 145 (VDP) in image data units, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a structure in which not all the image data is compressed but only a part thereof is compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub-display). It has a frame buffer area corresponding to liquid crystal).

The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. Then, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). Drawing, reading drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generating a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputting the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Also, various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

In addition, a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the image data between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function of converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , For example, the difference in resolution when connecting a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and that of a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots). Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70. The audio output device 9 is controlled to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE) and the like in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs the arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In accordance with the received production instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined production (outputs data and commands).

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, and the board lighting device 74 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp/drive control unit, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). ), based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from (1), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the board lighting device 74 is performed to perform a light emitting effect and the like. Alternatively, by performing drive control of the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board drive device 75, an operation effect (movement effect described above) or the like is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Supply to the production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power supply is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. The backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is off.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and the power supply voltage for backup stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off (power failure) is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is set to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power cut (power failure). Can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low-probability game state" and a "high-probability game state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and "non-time saving game" as a state regarding the movable member 48 included in the second starting opening 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low probability non-time saving game state which is "low probability game state" and "non-time saving game state" (2) Low probability time saving game state (3) which is "low probability game state" and "time saving game state" High-probability time-short game state that is "high probability game state" and "time-short game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is defined as "normal game state" in the present embodiment. ". In the present embodiment, the "low-probability time short game state" and "high-probability time short game state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low probability game state" means that the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is performed on condition that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. A winning state is a gaming state in which the winning probability is set as low as 1/299, for example. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" means a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set high, for example, 1/59.8. .. Therefore, in the “high-probability game state”, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the “low-probability game state”. The low-probability game state is changed to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game described later is finished.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a "probable variation jackpot." Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the normal symbol hitting lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal gate 44, the average fluctuation of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It is a gaming state in which the time is set to be longer than the "time saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning the winning is easily set to be short. For example, when the game ball passes through the universal symbol gate 44, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed, and a variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 62, but after the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started, For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, if the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in an open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in a normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning a hit is, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is set longer than the "non-time saving game state" Say Furthermore, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol hitting lottery is set to a low value, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving game state" the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 127, for example. It is set as high as /128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the universal gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open state than in the "non-time saving game state". As a result, in the "time saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time saving game state" is advantageous in the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, as compared with the "non-time saving game state". Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set such that only one of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning per hit in the normal symbol hit lottery may be 0/128, for example.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are selected as jackpot types that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45. The types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting opening 47 are “first jackpot” and “second jackpot”.

The "first big hit" executes the first big hit game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened up to 29.5 seconds at maximum and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds to execute a round game up to 10 times. It's a big hit. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (eg, 10) of game balls have won the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

After the end of the first jackpot game, it is set to the highly accurate short time gaming state until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially fixed.

The “second jackpot” is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability time short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The “third jackpot” is a jackpot that executes a third jackpot game that executes a round game up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-precision short time gaming state is set until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially fixed.

It should be noted that the variable display count (in the present embodiment, 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability time short game state, low-probability time short game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as “high probability. It may be expressed as “number of times” or “time saving number”.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpots, but the number of jackpots is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds regardless of which big hit (first big hit to third big hit), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds, and depending on the round game. Different opening times may be used.

(Type of hit)
Next, the type of winning will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are “first win” and “second win” as types of wins that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the gaming state at the time of being played is a non-time saving gaming state, it will be "first win", and if the gaming state when the winning lottery is executed is a time saving game state, it will be "second win".

The "first hit" is a hit for executing a first hit game in which the second starting opening 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit" is a hit for executing a second hit game in which the second starting opening 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. .. In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

As described above, in the "time saving game state", the game ball is easier to win in the second starting opening 47, and the player is more advantageous in consuming the game ball than in the "non-time saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the boot program is read from the main ROM 110b, and the processing of initializing the flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and the special symbol determination random number value, and in step S30, the jackpot determination Initial value random number value, special symbol determination initial value random number value, hit determination initial value random number value, and normal symbol determination initial value random number value is updated.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S20, and the power failure detection signal is detected. When the signal is input, the process proceeds to step S41.

The main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step S41, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores it in a predetermined storage. In step S44, a process of storing the data in the area is performed, and in step S44, a process of turning on a backup flag to be referred to at the time of recovery from power failure is performed. Wait until you get drunk.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric auditors etc. in step S110. Update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening/closing time of the movable member 48, and the like, and time control processing of updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening opening timer counter, or a starting opening closing timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a big hit determination random number value, a special symbol determination random number value, a special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, a hit determination random number value, a normal symbol determination random number value, and a universal symbol variation pattern determination. A specific random number update process for updating the random number for use is performed. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are incremented by 1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, The initial random number value to be set is set as a new orbital initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, a big hit determination initial value random number value, a special symbol determination initial value random number value, a hit determination initial value random number value, and a normal symbol determination initial value random number value. Initial value to be updated Random value update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a special winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and when there is an input, an input control process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (big hit determination, etc.), display control of special symbol, open/close control of special winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special state special electric control for performing game state control, etc. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal/general electric power control process for performing normal symbol storage determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, and opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48). ..

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10-prize sphere counter and the 15-prize sphere counter, a payout control process for transmitting a payout amount designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130 is performed. When the production control board 130 receives a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs control for performing a magnetic abnormality error notification or a radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning mouth opening and closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63 and The special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold display 64, and the data creation process to create data such as the normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65 are performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a outputs a signal such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening/closing data, and the special winning opening/closing data, a special symbol display data, a normal symbol display data. , Special symbol hold display data, display output processing for outputting signals such as normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Alternatively, an output control process for executing a production command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Main control board input control processing)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has won the general winning opening 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating the 10 winning balls is updated to the award ball counter for general winning openings (10 winning ball counter) used for the winning balls. Then, after adding (1) to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning port and updating (D←D+1), the general winning port detection switch input processing is ended.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating the 15 winning balls is added to the special winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the winning holes used for winning balls. Update and update (D←D+1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) that indicates the number of gaming balls that have entered the winning opening. Whether the current gaming state is the special gaming state Determine whether. When the current gaming state is the special gaming state, the round winning counter (C) for counting the gaming balls won in the special winning opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1). , The special winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not in the special gaming state, an illegal winning ball that indicates the number of gaming balls that have won (winning) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period The counter (E) is incremented by "1" and updated (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is greater than a prescribed number (for example, 10) to determine the illegal prize. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the special winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is determined that an illegal prize (illegal ball) occurs, in which a gaming ball wins (ball) outside the winning period. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, an incorrect winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 issues an incorrect prize error notification to notify that an incorrect prize has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the big winning opening. The switch input processing ends. Thereby, the illegal prize signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (identify) that the illegal prize has occurred in the external device.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. In this first starting opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 45 or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input processing shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether the game ball has passed the universal figure gate 44. When the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of public figure reservations, which is the number of general figure reservation storages stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved universal maps is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

If the number of reserved figures is less than 4, add 1 to the number of reserved figures to update it, and then change the random number value for hit judgment, the random number value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the random value value for determining the universal pattern variation pattern. Acquiring and searching the vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, storing the acquired random number value in the vacant storage unit, and ending the gate detection switch input processing.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In the winning confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the winning ball passage 52. When the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is the upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not it is within the range between 20) and the lower limit value (for example, -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) is not within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is determined that an abnormal winning (ball winning) has occurred, and an abnormal winning error designation command is stored in the production transmission data storage area. Set, external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the winning ball counter (D) is cleared, and a winning confirmation detection switch is set. Input processing ends. It should be noted that the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130, which has received the error designation command for abnormal prize, notifies the abnormal prize error to notify that the abnormal prize has occurred.

(Processing for inputting the first starting opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 The starting port detection switch input process is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three award balls to the three award ball counter used for the award balls, and in a step S230-3, the winning opening is won. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of entered game balls to update (D←D+1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of the first reservation storages stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than 4. .. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time The mouth detection switch input processing ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special symbol. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the symbol holding number (U1) is set in the production transmission data storage area.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires special figure determination information (a big hit determination random number value, a special symbol determination random number value, a reach determination random number value, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value), and a first special value. The vacant storage units are searched in sequence from the first storage unit in the symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage units.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area, special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination A first reserved memory composed of random number values) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table (not shown), the special symbol determination information (first reserved memory) acquired this time is displayed before the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination information is performed. Judgment is made and a planned fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting mouth winning award designation command corresponding to the planned fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for effect, and this time. The first starting opening detection switch input process is completed.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start mouth winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start mouth winning designation command causes the first start mouth winning designation command. The designated command is analyzed, and before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth winning award designation command is started, one or a plurality of variable displays executed before that are given predetermined notice effects. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

In addition, about the 2nd starting mouth detection switch input processing, 1st starting mouth detection switch 45a, 1st special design reservation storage area, 1st reservation storage, 1st special design reservation number (U1), 1st special design memory specification Command, 1st pre-judgment processing, 1st starting mouth winning appointing command, 2nd starting mouth detection switch 47a, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage, 2nd special design reservation number (U2), It should be replaced with the 2 special symbol memory designation command, the second preliminary determination process, and the second starting opening winning award designation command.

(Special control of special control of main control board)
The special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and stores special symbols if the special figure special power processing data=0. The process is moved to the determination process (step S310), the special symbol special power process data is set to 1 and the special symbol variation process (step S320) is moved, and the special symbol special power process data is set to 2 the special symbol stop process (step). If the special figure special electric power processing data=3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340). If the special figure special electric power processing data=4, the processing is moved to the big hit game ending processing (step S350). Transfer.

This "special figure special electric power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special electric figure special electric power control processing, as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a big hit, a process of determining the type of a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and a process of determining a variation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more In, if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, it is determined whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0") Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game is the start of the customer waiting state that is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is determined that the customer waiting state has started, and the customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area, and the special figure special electric processing data=0 is maintained. As it is, when the special symbol storage determination process of this time is finished and the customer waiting state determination flag is not “0”, the special symbol special electric processing data=0 is maintained as if the customer waiting state has already started. This special symbol memory determination process is ended.

If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random number values (special figure determination information) stored in one of the first to fourth storage sections are shifted to the previous storage section, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction corresponding to the second 2 Set the special symbol memory designation command in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among the various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reserved storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or "miss" to execute the big hit game.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special symbol reservation storage area After subtracting “1” from the stored value, the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the storage unit one before, The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among the various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reserved storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or "miss" to execute the big hit game.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is made based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in this 0th storage section. Based on the random number for the big hit symbol, the big hit special symbol or the lost special symbol is determined, and the effect symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, for the jackpot symbol stored in this 0th storage unit Special symbols (big hit special symbol, lost special symbol) are determined based on the random number value, and a production symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for production.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is made based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in this 0th storage section. Based on the reach judgment random number value and the random number value for special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. The corresponding variation pattern designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, for the reach determination stored in this 0th storage section Random number value, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern The specified command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of the special symbol in a predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The variable display of the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is performed.

Then, the special figure special electric power processing data=0 is set to the special figure special electric power processing data=1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has passed (special symbol time counter=0). When the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process of this time is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electricity process data=1.

When the variation time has elapsed, the special symbols determined in step S310 are displayed as a special jackpot special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, or the special symbols for losing are stopped and displayed. , Set a predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric power processing data=1 is set to the special symbol special electric power processing data=2, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol fluctuation processing of this time is ended.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process of determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electric power process data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the hour/hour count> 0, the hour/hour count counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the hour/hour count=0, the hour/hour game flag is cleared. 1 is subtracted from the probability counter and updated, and when the high probability count=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a special jackpot special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and special drawing special electric power processing data=2 to special electric power special processing data=3 are set. Then, the preparation for moving to the subroutine of the big hit game process is performed, and the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric power processing data=2 is set to the special symbol special electric power processing data=0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing To finish.

The main CPU 110a, in step S340, for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. The jackpot game processing is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 according to the type of jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game number (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls wins (balls) during this opening, or when the opening time of the special winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), it is large. The output of the drive data of the winning opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game of a predetermined number of times (four or 16 times in the present embodiment) is finished, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared and the special figure special electric power processing data=3. From the special figure special electric power processing data = 4 is set, it prepares to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and ends the jackpot game processing this time.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a probability game state of either a high probability game state or a low probability game state, and also determines a game state of either a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state. The jackpot game end process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stop symbol data), high probability game flag setting, high probability number of times setting, time saving game flag setting, setting of time saving number Performed, set from the special figure special electric power processing data = 4 to the special figure special electric power processing data = 0, prepare to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and finish the jackpot game ending processing of this time.

(Explanation of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. 78 and 79 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol memory designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved memories. The information of DATA is set according to.

This first special symbol storage designation command, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, in step S230-11, or in step S310, the pending storage after the increase or decrease The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol memory designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved memories. The information of DATA is set according to.

This second special symbol storage designation command, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area increases or decreases, in the step S240, or the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease in the step S310. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol storage designation command".

The "production symbol designating command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. If the first special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and if the second special symbol, "MODE" "Is set as "E2H", and the information of DATA is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of special symbol eventually determines the type of jackpot or the game state after the jackpot, the effect symbol designating command can be said to indicate the type of jackpot or the game state after the jackpot. ..

In this effect symbol designating command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designating command corresponding to the special symbol in the above step S310 is the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. And is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

The "variation pattern designating command for the first special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol, when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol display 60 is started, the variation for the first special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol in step S310. The pattern designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command, when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol display 61 is started, the variation for the second special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol in step S310. The pattern designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "00H".

This special symbol confirmation command, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the special symbol determination command in the step S320 is the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".

This normal symbol determination command, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol determination command in the above step S400 is the transmission data storage area for effect in the main RAM 110c. And is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "starting mouth prize designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and if it is based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting mouth 45, "MODE" Is set as "E6H", and if the game ball is based on the winning of the second starting opening 47, "MODE" is set as "E7H", and the information of DATA is set in accordance with various winning information. There is.

This start mouth prize designation command is a start mouth prize designation corresponding to the start prize information in step S230-10 or S240 when the game ball wins the first start mouth 45 or the second start mouth 47. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that various kinds of big hit games (special game state) are started, "MODE" is set to "E8H", and data of DATA according to the kind of big hit game. It is set.

This jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games start, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and step S800. Will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control processing of.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

When the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the step S340 to set the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds, and the output control process of step S800. Will be transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that various kinds of big hit games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the kind of big hit game.

When the various jackpot games are finished, this jackpot ending designation command is set to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in which the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in step S340. Will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control processing of.

The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA is set in accordance with the number of reserved storages. Information is set.

This normal symbol storage designation command, when the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, in the step S250, or in the step S400, the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease. The storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "universal figure designation command" indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the information of DATA is set in accordance with the type of the ordinary symbol. It is set.

In this general designating command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the general designating command corresponding to the normal symbol in the step S400 is the transmission data storage area for effect in the main RAM 110c. And is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

The "universal figure variation designation command" indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 62, "MODE" is set to "EEH", and the information of DATA according to the variation time of various ordinary symbols. Is set.

This general figure fluctuation designating command is set to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, in which the general figure fluctuation designating command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in step S400 when the variable display of the normal pattern is started. , Will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

When the auxiliary game is started, the hit opening designating command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game in the step S400, and the hitting opening designating command is set in step S800. In the output control process, it is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "winning ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

When the various auxiliary games are finished, this winning ending designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game in step S400, It is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not it is a time saving game state or a high-probability game state, and "MODE" is set to "F0H", and " "DATA" is set.

This game state designation command, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, at the end of the variation of the special symbol (at the start of the jackpot game), and at the end of the jackpot, in the game state in the step S310, the step S330, the step S350. The corresponding game state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power-restoration designation command" indicate whether or not power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is "F1H". “DATA” is set to “00H” when the main RAM 110c is initialized, and “DATA” is set to “01H to 03H” when the main RAM 110c is not initialized.

The power-on designation command and the power-restoration designation command are, when the game machine 1 is powered on, whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized in step S10, and a power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state, Alternatively, a power restoration specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, "MODE" is set to "F1H", and DATA is set to "04H" ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310 when the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is set, and in the output control processing of step S800. It will be transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when it is determined in the magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process in step S600 described above that a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality has occurred, or in the prize winning confirmation detection switch input process in step S260 described above that an abnormal prize has occurred. When it is determined that an illegal prize has been generated in the special winning opening detection switch input process of step S220 or the second starting opening detection switch input process of step S240, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is displayed in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the production transmission data storage area and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

Further, when the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are opened, the lower tray 12 is full, and a payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for performance. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

The "error release designation command" indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

This error cancellation designation command indicates the type of error that has been resolved when it is detected that the gaming board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is closed, the lower tray 12 is full, or the abnormal discharge is detected in the payout control board 120. A corresponding error cancellation designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

(Main process of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step E10, and performs an initialization process in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt in step E30, and performs a sub random number updating process in step E40. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control unit 130m every predetermined period (4 milliseconds).

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area in step E100, and performs the timer updating process in step E120. In this timer updating process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands are transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands are transmitted is performed. To do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power-on designation command is received, and when it is received, performs a process for notifying the power-on. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power restoration command is received, and when it is received, performs a process for giving a power failure restoration notification. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process in step E300. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received, and when the customer waiting state designation command is received, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds), the customer waiting effect is produced. Perform the processing to be performed. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The customer output demo sound is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E350, the sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process. Specifically, a process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command is received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is received is executed. To do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if received, stored in the sub RAM 130c 1 special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number, the normal symbol reservation number and the like is updated.

The sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect process in step E500. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the start mouth winning award designation command and the variation pattern designation command are received, and if they are received, the process related to the icon change effect is performed.

The icon change effect is a type of a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display status of the hold icon and the icon, and the timing and change mode (normal change, symbol action change, and character change will be described later in detail. Multiple changes are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect", and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "icon change effect".

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special map/special electric effect process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, effect design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command, special design determination command, big hit opening designation command, round designation command, big hit ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not is received, and when it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a universal figure/general electric vehicle effect process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, whether or not the universal figure designating command, the universal figure variation designating command, the ordinary symbol confirming command, the winning opening designating command, the winning ending designating command, etc. are received. It is determined whether or not, and when it is received, a process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process in step E850. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command is received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command. Is performed, or processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, it performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data or transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display/audio control unit 140 or the lamp/drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Icon change effect processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the already displayed icon (holding icon and the icon), and ends the icon change effect process of this time. To do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

(Icon change effect determination process of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start mouth winning award designation command is received. If the starting mouth winning designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E510-2. If the starting mouth winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning award designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the effect contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

The executable period of the icon change effect is that the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, conditions different from the above three conditions may be used.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold (holding storage corresponding to the previously received start opening winning award designation command) are equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold are normal fluctuations, It is determined whether the shortened fluctuation or the normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if all are below normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a obtains an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , An icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 84) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, and selects one of a plurality of icon final display modes based on the starting mouth winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value. Then, one icon final display mode is determined.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon) that is the normal display mode as the icon final display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-10. If it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 85) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 85, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a specifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon is displayed. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is ended. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the output control processing of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is first displayed. The image is displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the output control processing of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed as the first image. It is displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when the pre-holding preliminary determination results are all normal reach or less. The icon change effect may be executed when the pre-holding preliminary determination result indicates that the reach effect is not performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. By doing this, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is displayed during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode is changed, and the reach effect is not obstructed by the icon change effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the preliminary determination result of the preceding hold includes the one performing the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the preliminary determination result of the preceding hold includes the one performing the reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than when the reach effect is included in the case where there is no reach effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the starting mouth winning designation command, the icon display mode determination random value, and the icon final display mode to be selected, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 84. The random number value for determining the icon display mode is allocated so that

In the final display mode of the icons, a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons suggesting that there is a possibility of being a jackpot (a jackpot game is executed) The icon is set.

The expectation of winning the jackpot related to the special icon increases in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is determined to be a jackpot. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the effect contents. Specifically, in the present embodiment, if the effect content is SP reach or specific start winning information indicating SPSP reach, the effect content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not reach. The character icons are selected at a higher rate than in the case of the normal start winning information shown.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario decision table)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referenced when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the starting mouth winning award designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of the change scenario to be selected. For reference, the prior change in each change scenario and the update mode in the change are described.

Here, the “pre-variation” is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start mouth winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start mouth prize designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the preliminary change (the hold icon change effect is not executed) and changes during execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). A scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during execution of the preliminary change (the hold icon change effect is executed), but does not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios that are not executed (for example, scenario 02) and the display mode of the icon changes during execution of the pre-variation and during execution of the variation (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table according to the present embodiment, a scenario that changes the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (the reach other than the normal reach may be executed) is executed in the preliminary change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table that has a determination factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the preliminary change is executed. You may make it determine the scenario to be made. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon of the icon is changed during execution of the pre-change in which the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, although a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, the reach effect is generated more than during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set such that the change in the icon display mode occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-change that is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process of effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the icon display mode update process in effect control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and if the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the change scenario of the icon stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, whether or not there is a hold icon for changing (updating) the display mode. Determine whether. If there is a hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-4. If there is no hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for the hold icon (see FIG. 87) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

In step E520-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 87, among the plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the change of the hold icon and the selection rate (%) in this variation effect. From this, one hold icon change pattern is determined.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command according to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the output control processing of step E900, and the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing are changed. As a result, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon that changes the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-8, and if there is no icon that changes the display mode, the current icon display mode update process ends.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern from the plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon, which is the change target, in the change effect this time. The change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 88 and 89) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 88 or FIG. 89, a plurality of icons are selected based on the mode of the icon change and the selection rate (%) in the current variation effect. One icon change pattern is determined from the icon change patterns.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command according to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon display mode update process this time. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the output control processing in step E900, and the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing are changed. As a result, the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, and a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the type of the hold icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character with the appearance of the character and displaying the icon is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the mode changes, or a change notification pattern (special pattern) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variation effect is temporarily stopped and the change notification pattern acts as a starting point for the hold icon. A symbol action change pattern 01 is set in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

The change effect generation timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, when the variable effect is started (when the fluctuation starts), while the variable effect is being executed (during change), and the effect pattern. There is a case where 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopping).

At the stage of changing the holding icon, the jackpot winning expectation is changed to a display mode one level higher (for example, a CD icon changes to a blue character icon, a blue character icon changes to a red character icon), and a jackpot 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) that changes the winning expectation level to a display mode in two steps is set.

Although the change effect generation timing of the hold icon is the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variation effect is being executed (changing) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
88 and 89 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 88 changes the display mode of the icon by one step. 89 is a table referred to in the case, and FIG. 89 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon correlates the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character is performed to change the display mode of the icon are set.

The change effect generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, when the variable effect is started (when the fluctuation starts), while the variable effect is being executed (during change), and the effect symbol. There is a case where 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopping).

At the change stage of the icon, the jackpot winning expectation is changed to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a big hit. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning degree to a display mode in two steps.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be selected. For example, in the fluctuating effect of performing the pseudo continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be tentatively stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo fluctuating is performed.

With the pseudo continuous production, the variation display of the production symbol is executed a plurality of times for the jackpot determination based on the winning (ball entry) to the starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) once. In order to make it appear as if it was played, all the performances are made within the special figure fluctuation time determined for the winning (ball entry) to the starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) once. It is the variable display of the effect symbol of a special mode in which the re-variation display is started once or a plurality of times to start the variation again after the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped.

Although the change effect generation timing of the icon is the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variation effect is being executed (changing) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, or the like.

(Relationship between the change icon occurrence frequency of the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing a relationship of occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher occurrence frequency of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. ing.

Also, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to a blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, the hold icon is more than the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to a red character icon, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is more frequent than the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to a red character icon, the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command has a frequency of occurrence of the change effect more than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is executed when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, rather than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to the red character icon. It should be noted that the predetermined command is a start mouth winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is that the game ball wins the starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) and the hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing (the change effect at the time of winning) and a normal change pattern 01.
In addition, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to a red character icon that has a higher jackpot winning expectation than the frame update timing according to the reception of is high, it is possible to let the player pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing and improve the fun of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, since the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command occurs more frequently than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect that changes to the blue character icon occurs more frequently In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of jackpot winning, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relation effect generation frequency relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 90( b) is a diagram showing a relationship 1 of change effect occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the hold icon change effect has a higher change effect occurrence frequency than the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect generation frequency and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect, so the game The player's expectation for the jackpot game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the predetermined command is a start mouth winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 of change effect generation frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 90(c) is a diagram showing a relationship 2 of change effect occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is higher than that of the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received, the hold icon change effect has a lower change effect occurrence frequency than the icon change effect.

Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a time when the change effect is late, so the game It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by pulling the player's expectation for the jackpot game until the time when the variation production is delayed.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 90D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first occurrence notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon is generated (when changed to), The second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed), and when the hold icon and the red character icon is generated (changes to), the icon generation (changes to) is generated. The third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) as the notification sound at the time of icon change Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for the plurality of icon display modes (four types), but the notification sound generated when the CD icon is generated and the blue character icon and the red character icon are generated. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character, the notification sound may not be output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to any mode. You may make it output. In addition, as for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and three types may be provided.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 141)
Main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the general CPU 142, and the general CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt permission that permits the timer interrupt, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 to determine whether or not the production instruction command is received from the production control unit 130m. If it is determined and not received, the process moves to step T7. If it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command. Perform the animation pattern setting process.

The production instruction command includes a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group, the kind of object which forms the production image, the scene (timing) which displays the production image and the wait frame (display time), the target data (identification number of the sprite image, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that defines (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being.

The type of animation group includes, for example, a production symbol group for displaying the animation of the demonstration symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon or the animation of the icon, and a variable animation such as a background or a character. The variable effect group, the notice effect group for displaying the animation of the notice, the special game effect group for displaying the animation of the special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switch flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (for drawing a new effect image). If there is no frame switch flag, the process proceeds to step T4, and the frame switch flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the overall CPU 142 performs a display list generation/output process of generating a display list including a drawing control command group and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit, Alternatively, the display list is generated for each of a plurality of frames (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control processing described later, set the drawing control command according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are set sequentially from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the overall CPU 142 performs a drawing command process for instructing the drawing of the effect image based on the display list output to the image control unit 145 (VDP). By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is displayed on the first image display device. Processing for displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound list generation/output process of generating a sound list including a sound control command group and outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the overall CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output the sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are also synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is ended.

Although various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped, and vice versa.

In step T13, the overall CPU 142 performs an animation control process for updating the animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern as a preparation for creating the display list of the next frame, and then the process proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs a command reception process of receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m. Specifically, the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is stored in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144, and the current command reception interrupt process is ended.

(V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt process, the display of the effect image for one frame is completed from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time the V blank signal transmitted every second (about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the overall CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP) performs frame buffer switching command processing for instructing switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 seconds (about 33 ms). It will switch to and alternately.

In step T32, the overall CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the V blank interrupt process this time. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processing in steps T8 to T13 is executed every time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change production at winning)
94 and 95 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by a blue character icon when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the effect symbol 70a is normally varied. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, based on the game ball winning the first starting port 45, the starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. The output of does not start either.

At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second occurrence notification sound. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is continuously output from the audio output device 9. It

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is continuously output from the audio output device 9. It

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect, which is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuating period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the second occurrence notification sound was started (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the above, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Becomes

(Example of directing changes when winning)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is (is changed to) a blue character icon when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), the effect design 70a is variably displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in the state where no hold storage is stored. The normal fluctuating effect is being executed.

Here, based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, the icon change effect determining process is executed, and as a change scenario. It is assumed that “scenario 02” (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 96(b), in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 45, the first holding icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B. The icon) H11 is displayed, and the second output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96(c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, "234") indicating that the effect design 70a that has been variably displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display area. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96(f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although illustration is omitted, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variation effect. The same applies to the subsequent FIGS. 99, 102, 103, 106, and 107.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
97 and 98 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output from the voice output device 9 is generated. The output of the notification sound is not started.

At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame (timing at which the variation effect is started) after the next variation effect is started. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second occurrence notification sound. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Images, various icon images, etc.) are started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device. The icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the second occurrence notification sound was started (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the above, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Becomes

(Example of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of change (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) H11, H12 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect design indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and at the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. H11 and H12 are shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shift-displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. Further, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(c), stop display is performed with a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the variable effect representation 70a is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(d), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(e), while the production symbol 70a of “2” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
100 and 101 are timings showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the timing when the fluctuating effect is started) which is the first frame after the fluctuating effect is started and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal fluctuating period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the 61st frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice is not displayed. The output device 9 also does not start outputting the third generated notification sound.

At timing T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the existing image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device. However, the sound output device 9 does not output the third generation notification sound. Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the 91st frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generated notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continued. It

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 continues to be output, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame from the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character) is displayed on the image display device. The icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuating period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data 1 (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started in the first frame buffer, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen k (display of red character icon) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared with the case where the frame update timing of the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the frame update timing is different from the stop of the output, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

(Example of character action change pattern 01)
102 and 103 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the effect design 70a is variably displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in the state where no hold storage is stored. A normal variation effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 102(b)), the character C1 performs a throw-kiss operation to direct the heart H to the icon (CD icon) TH. The production to fly is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 102(d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and at the same time, the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the central variable display area. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 103(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the teammate character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the variation design 70a showing that the effect design 70a is a big hit ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 103(d), the effect design 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
104 and 105 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display form update process and the display form of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the timing when the fluctuating effect is started) which is the first frame after the fluctuating effect is started and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal fluctuating period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the change pattern or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 Therefore, the output of the third generation notification sound is not started.

At timing T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changed pattern images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. Output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changed pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change pattern display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is a timing of the 331st frame after the variation effect is started, and is a frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen h (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 notifies the third occurrence. Sound output is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern image, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen i (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) are started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data 1 (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started in the first frame buffer, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the temporary stop effect display screen k (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared with the case where the frame update timing of the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the frame update timing is different from the stop of the output, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 106 and 107 are diagrams showing an example of production in the case where the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a red character icon while the effect design 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) (design effect change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in the state in which the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the normal change is performed in which the effect design 70a is variably displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the central variable display area is stopped (tentatively displayed. While displaying (stop display), an effect such as lightning appears from the change pattern that is stop displayed (temporary stop display) in the central variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1, When hit, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(c), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(a), while the production symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 107(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the teammate C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the variation design 70a showing that the effect design 70a is a big hit ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 107(d), the effect design 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command (starting mouth winning award designation command or variation pattern designation command), Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start mouth winning designation command in the icon change effect, the final display mode and the scenario are determined, but the determination method is not limited to this. .. For example, each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed, it may be determined whether or not the display mode is changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start mouth winning award designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is a timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. If so, it may be decided each time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the icons (the relevant icon, the hold icon), there are four types of icons: a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. However, the number is not limited to four, and may be large or small.

For example, a special icon (flashing CD icon) that has a lower jackpot winning expectation than the blue character icon and suggests that it may change to a special icon may be provided. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after the variation pattern designation command is received In a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing), it is desirable not to change to a special icon. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, which are likely to change to a display mode in which the jackpot winning expectation is high In the change effect that occurs in (1), it will not be changed to a special icon, so it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode of the icon while preventing the player from being discouraged and improve the entertainment of the game. It will be possible.

In addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon It should be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be provided a case where the character C1 or the changing pattern is not changed even when displayed (so-called gaze effect). When such a gaze effect is provided, the gaze effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) The rate of execution is higher than that of the gaze effect for the change effect when winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character action change It is desirable to be able to execute only the gaze effect for the pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but it may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so the normal change The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display form of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variation effect, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting mouth winning designation. The frame update timing is two frames later than the number of frames that received a command or fluctuation pattern designation command). It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the change pattern designating command, but the present invention is not limited to this timing and, for example, The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the symbol memory designating command or the effect symbol designating command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 02”, the “character effect change pattern 01”, and the “symbol effect change pattern 01” are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. Although the change effect is executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) is changed, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, the hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon. In this case, like the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, at the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At the same time (synchronously), the light emission of the lamp of the panel lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may be started, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamp may be set to end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may be ended (synchronously) at the frame update timing for deleting the icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but they are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted by the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted by the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received) may not be executable. By doing so, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short variation time, so the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and , By restricting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), the first specific game state, and the game characteristic of the second specific game state It is possible to improve the interest of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon or the icon itself, but the present invention is not limited to such a change and the display of the hold icon or the icon itself. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around the hold icon or the icon (vicinity). A character showing the jackpot winning expectation degree may be displayed, or a character image suggesting an effect to be executed around (on the periphery of) the hold icon or the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-reel"). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, the determination is made regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, but the change scenario may be determined with reference to the jackpot or winning. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the current number of holdings, the big hit, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when the change scenario is determined with reference to the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, it is more likely that the current pending number is "1" or "2". The selection rate (%) in which the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected may be set for "3" and "4".
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, when the current number of holdings is "3" or "4", when the winning character is a red character when you win the prize. It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult for a change scenario that changes to an icon to be selected.
Also, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are lost and change to a red character icon, a change scenario that changes to a red character icon at the time of winning rather than if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hold icon change pattern is determined, it is determined regardless of the current number of holdings or the jackpot win, but the determination may be made by referring to the current number of holdings or the jackpot win. May be. Specifically, one hold icon is selected from among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the current number of holds, the jackpot win/loss, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when the hold icon change pattern is determined with reference to the current hold number and jackpot wins, when the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current hold number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) at which “normal change pattern 01” is easily selected as the hold icon change pattern may be set more when “3” or “4” than when “2”.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern when the current hold number is "1" or "2" is larger than when the hold number is "3" or "4". It can be said that “normal change pattern 01” is hard to be selected as a selection rate (%).
When the jackpot is not won, that is, when the jackpot is lost and changes to a red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01 “” can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when changing to the red character icon in the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command), the current hold number is “1”. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because the jackpot winning expectation is higher in the case of “3” or “4” than in the case of “” or “2”.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, description of the same parts as those of the third embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109A, in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a special symbol TZ that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is different from the third embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

Further, on the left end portion of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying a first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1), and the current first It is also different from the third embodiment in that the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the 2 special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

It should be noted that the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area The first hold icon displayed in 70B and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is execution information. Equivalent to.

(Specific example when variation production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 109(a) to (f) and FIGS. 110(g) to (k) show (a) to (k) in FIG. It is the figure which shows the production example which corresponds to.

First, the timing of T0 is the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is increased from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon is generated. The output of is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs a first notification sound (pico).

The timing of T2, the first special symbol hold number (U1) is reduced from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state) From the 5th frame). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated reduction display of the first hold number, and the animation change display (reduction display) of the first hold icon to the icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from “1” to “0”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame from the start of the output of the first generation notification sound (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display (reduction display) of the first hold icon (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and With the icon TH, the reduction display of the effect design 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) which is the 40th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect design 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect design 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the variation effect is started (the 55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect design 70a in the central variable display area, the variable display on the right is displayed. Scrolling (movement in the downward direction) of the effect design 70a in the area is started, and the effect design 70a is in a state of being scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is a timing (the 230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) which becomes the 225th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is provisionally stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is provisionally stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after reaching the 285th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “6” is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(k), in the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the variable display area on the left middle right is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop combination is displayed with the same combination "365" as the design 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the special symbol holding number increases (changes from "0" to "1") in the customer waiting state, the number of holding numbers and the holding icon for non-animated increase display is the shortest for one frame. Since it ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so as not to extend the time period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the generated alarm sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is until the (frame update) timing after the (frame update) timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update). Since it continues, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a decrease display of non-animation of the hold number and a change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to surely let the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the special symbol is held because the timing of the reduced display of the held numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing of the change display of the hold icon being changed (frame update). While making the number change, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the special symbol holding number has decreased due to the holding number, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Also, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) Since the scroll (update to the next effect design) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold storage is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol hold number increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold icon is not displayed non-animated, but rather than the hold number is displayed. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of special symbols reserved, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the reduction display of the pending numbers and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same (frame update) timing, the reduction display of the pending numbers is completed (frame update) timing. If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of display control and to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed more than usual), the change display of the hold icon is changed. A little before completion (frame update) timing, scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable effect, and FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c) are diagrams showing effect examples corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) is increased from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the animation increase display of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display unit 70B1 and the enlarged display is started. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs a first notification sound (pico).

The timing of T3 is the timing (the 70th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect) which is the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started. At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbols is increased, non-animated increase display of the hold numbers and increase display of animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the special symbol hold number is increased Can be surely recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of special symbols is changed because the timing of the increase display of the held numbers (frame update) is earlier than the timing of the increase display of the hold icons (frame update). While producing that, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special symbols held has been increased by the number held, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the reservation icon is executed for a longer period than when the special symbol reservation number increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to surely let the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special symbol hold number is It is possible to effectively produce the increased amount, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon (20 frames), the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that, instead of starting the increase display of the hold numbers and the increase display of the hold icons at the same (frame update) timing, if the increase display of the hold numbers (frame update) timing is earlier May be started first. By doing so, while increasing the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be set to be longer than the period related to the increase display of the hold icon, rather than the period related to the change display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, rather than shortening the period relating to the increase display of the hold icon, the period may be set to be the same as the period relating to the change display of the hold icon.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the number of holdings decreases will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 113 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 114(a) to 114(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 113.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" and the special symbol TZ indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. ing. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (20th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed) when the variation effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first hold number, the animation change display of the first hold icon to the icon, and the animation decrease of the first hold icon The display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70 E changes from “2” to “1”. .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display region 70C, and at the same time, is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. The 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number starts, but since the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification when the icon occurs The output of the generated notification sound, which is a sound, is on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(c), in the first image display device 70, the first hold digit displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect design 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the reduction display of the first hold icon (the 40th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are finished. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first hold icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is also started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display portion 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. While becoming the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect design 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 to start the enlarged display, and at the same time, the first output notification sound (pico) is output from the voice output device 9. It

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first occurrence notification sound are continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generation notification sound (pico) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a (movement in the downward direction) in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special symbols is increased during the execution of the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Even before the timing, since the increase display of the hold number is started, it is possible to let the player recognize that the special symbol hold number has increased even while the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are being executed. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbols is increased during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound are waited (limit). Every time, when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so it is difficult to grasp the transition of the special symbol hold number Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It should be noted that, instead of outputting the generated notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold numbers, the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold numbers. Good.

In addition, at the timing when the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are not started (start is delayed more than usual), but the change of the hold icon is performed. The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display and the decrease display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the number of special symbols held, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the number of special symbols is increased while the hold icon is being increased, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound are waited (restricted) as in the case of the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number is started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 116(a) to 116(f) are diagrams showing effect examples corresponding to FIGS. 115(a) to 115(f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(a), in the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "7" is provisionally stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 and the icon (CD icon) TH are displayed on the first display section 70B1.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolled in the central variable display area are moved to the upper left of the screen. Start moving and reducing display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing the SP reach effect is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(b), in the first image display device 70, scrolling is performed in the effect symbol 70a of "7" that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the central variable display area. The produced design 70a is displayed in a position near the upper left of the screen and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the SP reach effect is started while the development effect is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. The confrontation effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, with the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C being left, the hold icon (here, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D)). The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol holding number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the occurrence of the icon at this timing are performed. The generated notification sound, which is a notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold digit displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final effect (decision effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) of the confrontation effect is executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is started (the 880th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and at the same time, the effect pattern 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen. Will be temporarily stopped (it will be in a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that it is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first hold icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a that has been reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (the swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in the normal size.

Then, finally, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, right, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is also stopped and displayed in the same combination "777" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the special symbol hold number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even if it is before the timing (frame update) when this specific effect ends (frame update), Since the increased display is started, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special symbol hold number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). At the timing when the lost effect design or the jackpot effect design is enlarged (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special design hold number and improve the fun of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by the non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, so the timing when the special symbol hold number increases Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing of executing the increased display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols is increased during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), while the increase display of the hold number is executed, the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (limit). In addition, it is preferable that the increase display of the hold icons corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update) is collectively executed in one frame.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is not output, but the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is illustrated as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state, and FIGS. 118(a) to (f) and FIGS. 119(g) to (i) show (a) to ((a) of FIG. 117. It is a figure showing an example of production corresponding to i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(a), "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and "4" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. Then, the icon TH is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is directed toward the right side region of the game region 5a in the upper right part of the screen. A right-handed image MU that prompts to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the variation effect is started) in which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B has been erased, the first hold icon increases display and a notification sound when the icon occurs. The generation notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(b), in the first image display device 70, the first withdrawal number displayed in the first withdrawal number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect design 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the effect symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display area are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol "285" of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the left, right, and middle variable display areas. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result display showing the result of the game in the predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG goes dark, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and during a predetermined advantageous period. The number of jackpot games executed is displayed as "bonanza x 1". Further, the temporarily stopped effect design 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the result display is started (the 460th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls that have been acquired (disbursed) during the predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame from the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is also displayed. The display is stopped and displayed with the same combination "285" as the effect design 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second hold number, the animation change display of the second hold icon to the icon, the second hold icon animation decrease display, The non-animated return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F changes from “4” to “3”. At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display region 70C, and at the same time, the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed on the display start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled. Further, on the upper left of the screen, a left hitting image HU is displayed which prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display portion 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. While becoming the icon TH, the second holding icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect design 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect) which is the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed. At this timing, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a (movement in the downward direction) continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(i), in the first image display device 70, after the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area is scrolled, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is changed. Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, while waiting (limit) the increase display of the first hold icon, the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the first hold icon is displayed at the timing when the specific game state (last variation effect in) ends (frame update). In order to start, even if you miss the increase display of the first hold number executed before that, it can be recognized that the first special symbol hold number has increased, improve the entertainment of the game It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in it) is finished, since the increase display of the hold icon by the non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, the special symbol hold Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number is increased and the timing when the hold icon is increased and displayed, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in the) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is generated at the timing when the specific game state is ended by the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) Since the scroll (update to the next effect design) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even when the first special symbol hold number increases by a plurality during the specific game state, while the increase display of the hold number is executed, the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (limit), It is only necessary to collectively display, in one frame, the increase display of the hold icons that have increased at the timing (frame update) when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) has ended.

In addition, when the first special symbol reservation number increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved numbers.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (display). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (display) during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but are set on the second image display device 71 ( It may be displayed (displayed) or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when the dedicated LED is set, it is preferable to display the special symbol holding number by the lighting color of the LED.

[Technical features of the present invention]
The first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that controls the production according to the determination by the determination means, a first mode (for example, a low probability time short non-gaming state) and a second mode (for example, a high probability time short gaming state). ) And controllable game control means (for example, the game control unit 200), and, the effect control means, the first symbol that can be displayed in the first area of the display means based on the satisfaction of the starting condition (for example, , A left decorative design 41) and a second design (for example, right decorative design 41) that can be displayed in the second area, a symbol display effect for controlling display of a plurality of designs (for example, three decorative designs 41) is performed, In the variable display for changing the plurality of symbols, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and the variation of other symbols (for example, middle decorative symbol 41) is continued. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), and in the symbol display effect, when the predetermined effect is performed, the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are deviated from the symbol (for example, a symbol). 37 (A-9) is temporarily stopped as a decorative design 41 of the outlier, and the temporarily stopped said first design (for example, the left decorative design 41 of FIG. 37 (A-9)) and said second design ( For example, it is possible to perform a display effect in which at least one of the right decorative patterns 41) of FIG. 37(A-9) approaches the other (for example, the approach display effect of FIG. 37(A-10)), and the predetermined effect. When the disengagement pattern is temporarily stopped after, the second mode (for example, FIGS. 35(B-1) to (B-4), FIGS. 36(B-5) to (B-8), and FIG. 37( B-9) to (B-12) the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35(A-1) to (A-4), the figure rather than the high probability short time gaming state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is performed) 36 (A-5) to (A-8), and the low probability short time non-gaming state in which the variable display of the decorative design 41 of FIGS. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) is performed) The feature is that it is easy to produce.
With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect in which the player pays attention to the out-of-design, depending on the game state, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the effect using the decorative pattern. it can.

The second configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. An effect control unit (for example, effect control unit 300) that controls an effect according to the determination made by the determination unit, and the effect control unit can be displayed in the first area on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Display control of a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) including a first symbol (for example, left decorative symbol 41) and a second symbol (for example, right decorative symbol 41) that can be displayed in the second area. In the variable display for performing the symbol display effect and varying the plurality of symbols, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and another symbol (for example, a medium decorative symbol) 41) It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) that continues to change, and when the predetermined effect is performed in the symbol display effect, it is highly possible that the special game is performed. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect of FIG. 43(8)), and when performing the predetermined effect, the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are deviated from the symbol (for example, a symbol). 42(5) is temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern 41 of the staggered pattern, and the temporarily stopped first symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 42(5)) and the second symbol (for example, FIG. 42 ( It is possible to perform a display effect in which at least one of the right decorative pattern 41) in 5) approaches the other (for example, the approach display effect in FIG. 42(6)), and the specific effect (for example, in FIG. 43(8)). In the case where the specific effect is not performed rather than the SP reach effect), the display effect (for example, the approach display effect in FIG. 42(6)) is set when the stray pattern is temporarily stopped after the predetermined effect. It is easy to do.
With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect in which the player pays attention to the out-of-design, depending on whether or not to perform the specific effect, so that the effect using the decorative pattern is interesting. Can be improved.

A third configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has a judging means (for example, a special symbol judging section 234) for judging the gaming state triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and an effect according to the judgment by the judging means. Production control means for controlling (for example, production control unit 300), a first mode (for example, a low probability short time non-gaming state) and a second mode (for example, a high probability short time gaming state) controllable game control means. (For example, a game control unit 200), and the effect control means performs a symbol display effect of controlling display of a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means based on the establishment of the starting condition. , In the variable display for changing the plurality of symbols, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and a change of other symbols (for example, middle decorative symbol 41) is displayed. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect that continues (for example, reach effect), and when performing the predetermined effect, a specific identification element for identifying a symbol among the partial symbols (for example, FIG. 36(B-5)). It is possible to magnify and display the numeral element 411 of FIG. 35, and when performing the predetermined effect, the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35(A-1) to (A-4) and FIG. 36(A-5). To (A-8), and the low probability short time non-gaming state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 of FIGS. 37(A-9) to (A-11) is performed, the second mode (for example, FIG. 35( B-1) to (B-4), FIG. 36 (B-5) to (B-8), and FIG. 37 (B-9) to (B-12) The variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is high. In the probability time saving game state), it is easier to enlarge and display the specific identification element after the start of the predetermined effect.
With such a configuration, an effect that focuses on an effect image other than a specific identification element in the symbol and an effect that gives the player an impression as to which of the symbols are aligned and the predetermined effect is performed are set in the game state. Since they can be switched according to each other, it is possible to improve the interest in the production using the decorative pattern.

The fourth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when the variable display is started, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character. And a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1(1) that mainly includes the identification character when the variable display is started). ) Decorative pattern 41) and the second display mode is different from the first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 62-1(1)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 64). (1) decorative pattern 41), and when using the first mode, the time for displaying the plurality of effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner, as compared to the case of using the second mode Is a gaming machine characterized by a long length.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains the determination information when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, the random number obtaining unit 231), and whether to perform the special game based on the determination information. When determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) and notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the effect symbols, effect control in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner Means (for example, effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when starting the variable display, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element) corresponding to the identification character. 413) and a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1) in which the identification character is the main body when starting the variable display (for example, FIG. 62-1). (1) decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 62-1 (1)) and a second mode in which the respective arrangements of the symbols are different from each other. (For example, with the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 64 (1)), in the case where the first mode is used, a plurality of the effect patterns can be visually recognized as compared with the case where the second mode is used. It is characterized in that the time for displaying them in parallel (for example, the time for temporarily stopping) is long.

The fifth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the production control unit 300) is provided, and the production control means is capable of executing a special production (for example, reach-inspired production) for inspiring whether or not the production symbol is reach, and the production symbol is A first display mode (for example, the decoration of FIG. 58A) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. There is a pattern 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) mainly including the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display modes are mutually different. The display mode includes a first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 65-1(1)) and a second mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61(1)), and the first mode is used. The rate of performing the special effect is different between the variation effect and the variation effect using the second aspect, and the probability of performing the special game in the variation in which the effect symbol executes reach after executing the special effect is The variation effect using the second aspect is higher than the variation effect using the first aspect.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains the determination information when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, the random number obtaining unit 231), and whether to perform the special game based on the determination information. When determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) and notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the effect symbols, effect control in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner Means (for example, effect control unit 300), and, the effect control means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, reach agitation effect) that agitates whether or not the effect symbol reaches, and the effect symbol. Is a first display mode (for example, FIG. 58(1)) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. And a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) mainly including the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is , A first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 65-1(1)) and a second mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) in which the respective patterns are arranged differently from each other, and The variation effect using the first aspect and the variation effect using the second aspect differ in the ratio of executing the special effect, and a special game in a variation in which the effect symbol executes reach after executing the special effect. The probability of performing is characterized in that the variation effect using the second aspect is higher than the variation effect using the first aspect.

The sixth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the production control unit 300) is provided, and the production control unit can execute a predetermined change production (for example, reach time schematic production) of the production design when the reach is reached, and the production design is , A first display mode (for example, FIG. 58(1)) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. There is a decorative pattern 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) mainly including the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is The first display mode includes a first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 65-1(1)) and a second mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) different in display mode from each other. Is more likely to execute the predetermined change effect than the second aspect.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains the determination information when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, the random number obtaining unit 231), and whether to perform the special game based on the determination information. When determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) and notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the effect symbols, effect control in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner Means (for example, effect control unit 300), and the effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined change effect (for example, reach-time drawing effect) of the effect symbol when reaching, and the effect. The pattern has a first display mode (for example, FIG. 58(1) having identification characters (for example, numeral element 411) and decorativeness (for example, character element 413) corresponding to the identification characters when the variable display is started. ) Decorative pattern 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) mainly including the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode Has a first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 65-1(1)) and a second mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61(1)) in which the arrangement of each pattern is different from each other, The first display mode is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than the second mode.

A seventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the effect control unit 300), and the effect symbol, as a display mode displayed in the same game state (for example, low probability time saving no game state), the identification character (when the variable display is started. For example, the variable display is started with the first display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 58(1)) having the number element 411) and the decorativeness (for example, the character element 413) corresponding to the identification character. Occasionally, it has a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 62-1(1)) mainly composed of the identification character, and uses the second display mode and the first display mode. It is characterized in that the time for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner is different from that in the case.

The eighth structure for achieving the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when the variable display is started, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character. And a first display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 67(1)) and a second display mode mainly including the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, in FIG. 67(6)). Decorative pattern 41) and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 67(6)) and a second mode (for example, FIG. ) Of the decorative pattern 41) and the suggestion effect (for example, the introduction image 94) that suggests that the change effect using the first aspect is started when the change effect using the first aspect is started. And the probability variation mode end image 99) can be executed, and the suggestion effect (for example, display of the introduction image 94) in the case of switching from the variation effect using the first display mode to the variation effect using the first mode. It is characterized by higher expectation than the suggestive effect (for example, display of the probability variation mode end image 99) when the variable effect using the second aspect is switched to the variable effect using the first aspect. ..
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains the determination information when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, the random number obtaining unit 231), and whether to perform the special game based on the determination information. When determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) and notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the effect symbols, effect control in which a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner Means (for example, effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern, when starting the variable display, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element) corresponding to the identification character. 413) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 67(1)) and the second display mode mainly including the identification characters when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 67(6)). ) Decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 67(6)) and a second mode (for example, FIG. 68-2 (10) decorative pattern 41), and suggestion suggesting that the variation effect using the first aspect is started when the variation effect using the first aspect is started ( For example, the introduction image 94 and the probability variation mode end image 99 can be displayed, and the suggestion effect (for example, the introduction image) when the variation effect using the first display mode is switched to the variation effect using the first mode The display 94 is higher in expectation than the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the probability variation mode end image 99) when the change effect using the second aspect is switched to the change effect using the first aspect. It is characterized by

A ninth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the production control unit 300) is provided, and the production control means can execute a special production (for example, reach production) that fuels whether or not the production design is reach, and the first game state ( For example, in the low probability short time non-gaming state) and the second gaming state (for example, high probability short time gaming state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the ratio of executing the special effect Different, the probability of performing a special game in the variation in which the effect symbol executes reach after executing the special effect is characterized in that the second game state is higher than the first game state.

The tenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) obtains determination information (for example, a random number obtaining unit 231) that obtains determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234), and when the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, a plurality of effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visually recognizable manner. For example, the production control unit 300) is provided, and the production control unit can execute a predetermined change production (for example, reach time schematic production) of the production design when the reach is reached, and the production design is , As a display mode displayed in the same game state (for example, a low probability time saving non-game state), when the variable display is started, an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property corresponding to the identification character ( For example, a first display mode having a character element 413) (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 59-1(1)), and a second display mode having the identification character as a main body when starting the variable display ( For example, having the decorative pattern 41) of FIG. 61(1) and using the first display mode is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than using the second display mode. Is characterized by.

41... Decorative design (an example of design)
100... Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)
114... Image display unit (an example of display means)
200... Game control section (an example of game control means)
231... Random number acquisition unit (an example of an acquisition unit)
233... Special symbol variation control unit (an example of symbol control means)
234... Special symbol determination unit (an example of determination means)
300... Production control unit (an example of production control means)
310... Image/sound control unit (an example of effect control means)

Claims (2)

An acquisition means for acquiring the judgment information when the start condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information,
When the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control means for aligning and displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner,
The effect design is
There is a first display mode having an identification character and a decorative property corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started, and a second display mode having the identification character as a main component when the variable display is started. Then
The second display mode is
A first mode and a second mode, which are different in display mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the first mode is used, it takes a longer time to display a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner than when the second mode is used. An acquisition means for acquiring the judgment information when the start condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information,
When the effect symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control means for aligning and displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner,
The effect design is
There is a first display mode having an identification character and a decorative property corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started, and a second display mode having the identification character as a main component when the variable display is started. Then
The second display mode is
Each pattern has a first aspect and a second aspect that are different from each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the first mode is used, it takes a longer time to display a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner than when the second mode is used.